Garmin | G1000: Diamond DA42-L360 | Garmin G1000: Diamond DA42-L360 G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360

Garmin G1000: Diamond DA42-L360 G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
G1000
®
Integrated Flight Deck
Pilot’s Guide
®
G1000 Pilot’s Guide
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099
www.garmin.com
Diamond
DA42-L360
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p:44/0870.8501241
f:44/0870.8501251
190-01061-02
Revision A
Diamond DA42-L360
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2008, 2009, 2011,2013 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 1054.03 or later for the Diamond DA40-L360 Some differences in operation
may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411Fax: 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K
Tel: 44/0870.8501241Fax: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
For after-hours emergency, aircraft on ground (AOG) technical support for Garmin panel mount and integrated avionics systems, please
contact Garmin’s AOG Hotline at 913.397.0836.
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin® and G1000® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are trademarks of Garmin
Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Honeywell® is a registered trademark of Honeywell International, Inc. Stormscope® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications.
Avidyne® is a registered trademark of Avidyne Corporation. Sirius, XM, and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio,
Inc. and its subsidiaries.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
September 2013
Printed in the U.S.A.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY
This Garmin product is warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase. Within this
period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made
at no charge to the customer for parts and labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty
does not cover failures due to abuse, misuse, accident, or unauthorized alterations or repairs.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not
allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace the unit or software, or to offer a full refund of the purchase price, at its sole
discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating a Service Center near you, visit
the Garmin Website at “http://www.garmin.com” or contact Garmin Customer Service at 800-800-1020.
Products sold through online auctions are not eligible for warranty coverage or rebates or other special offers from Garmin. Online auction
confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification. To obtain warranty service, an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original
retailer is required. Garmin will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
i
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance
feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the G1000 system must be updated
regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data is
intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources like Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
ii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for hazardous
weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or
incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: The Garmin G1000, as installed in this aircraft, has a very high degree of functional integrity.
However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable
system failures is not practical. Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur
without a fault indication shown by the G1000. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect such an
occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit.
WARNING: For safety reasons, G1000 operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G1000 utilize GPS as a precision electronic
NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G1000 can be
misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the G1000
Pilot’s Guide documentation and the Airplane Flight Manual. Thoroughly practice basic operation prior
to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications from the G1000 to all available
navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts, etc. For safety
purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the G1000 to attempt to penetrate
a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical Information
Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an
intense radar echo.”
WARNING: Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of
according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the G1000 within the following
areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes; South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia);
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand)
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
iii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The Garmin G1000 does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by
an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty
and the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby
thunderstorms that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of
two or more discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points
reappear after the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the G1000 panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G1000 system. Depictions of
equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 feet
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
iv
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revision
Part Number
190-01061-00
190-01061-00
190-01061-00
190-01061-01
190-01061-02
190-01061-02
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Revision
A
B
C
A
A
B
Date
03/10/09
03/16/09
04/14/09
09/01/10
12/6/11
11/24/13
Page Range
i - I-6
i - I-6
i - I-6
i - I-6
i - I-6
i - I-6
Description
Initial release
Clerical changes
Clerical changes
Added Synthetic Vision System and other GDU 9.05 parameters
Added GDU 11.13 parameters
Added TAWS-B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Line Replaceable Units............................................ 2
Secure Digital (SD) Cards........................................ 7
System Power-up...................................................... 8
System Operation..................................................... 9
Display Operation.......................................................... 9
G1000 System Annunciations....................................... 10
System Status.............................................................. 11
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 13
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 14
G1000 Controls....................................................... 18
PFD/MFD Controls....................................................... 18
Softkey Function.......................................................... 20
Accessing G1000 Functionality............................ 27
Menus........................................................................ 27
Data Entry.................................................................. 27
Page Groups............................................................... 29
System Settings........................................................... 33
Timers........................................................................ 38
Scheduler.................................................................... 40
Display Backlighting.............................................. 42
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................. 46
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 46
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 48
Altimeter.................................................................... 49
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 51
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 52
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 53
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 58
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data..................................... 65
Outside Air Temperature............................................... 65
Wind Data.................................................................. 67
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 68
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions......... 69
System Alerting........................................................... 69
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 70
Traffic Annunciation..................................................... 70
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 71
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 71
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 71
vi
2.4 Abnormal Operations............................................ 73
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 73
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 74
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
3.1 Engine Display........................................................ 78
3.2 Lean Display............................................................ 80
3.3 System Display....................................................... 83
Fuel calculations.......................................................... 85
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview................................................................. 87
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display...................... 88
Audio Panel Controls................................................... 90
COM Operation....................................................... 92
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation...................... 92
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................... 93
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz..................... 94
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency................................... 95
Frequency Spacing....................................................... 99
Automatic Squelch..................................................... 100
Volume..................................................................... 100
NAV Operation...................................................... 101
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 101
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 102
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD................ 104
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 109
ADF/DME Tuning....................................................... 110
GTX 33 Mode S Transponder............................... 114
Transponder Controls................................................. 114
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 115
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 118
IDENT Function......................................................... 119
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 120
Additional Audio Panel Functions...................... 121
Power-up.................................................................. 121
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 121
Speaker.................................................................... 121
Intercom................................................................... 122
Passenger Address (PA) System................................... 124
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 124
Split COM................................................................. 125
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 125
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure........................ 126
4.7 Abnormal Operation............................................ 127
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 127
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 127
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.................................. 127
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 127
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Introduction.......................................................... 129
Navigation Status Box................................................ 130
Using Map Displays.............................................. 132
Map Orientation........................................................ 132
Map Range............................................................... 134
Map Panning............................................................. 136
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 141
Topography............................................................... 142
Map Symbols............................................................ 145
Airways.................................................................... 151
Track Vector.............................................................. 153
Wind Vector.............................................................. 154
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 155
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 156
Field of View (SVS)..................................................... 157
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.................................... 158
Waypoints.............................................................. 159
Airports.................................................................... 160
Intersections............................................................. 167
NDBs........................................................................ 169
VORs........................................................................ 171
User Waypoints......................................................... 173
Airspaces............................................................... 179
Direct-to-Navigation ........................................... 183
Flight Planning...................................................... 189
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 190
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 195
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 197
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 199
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 206
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 208
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 211
Parallel Track............................................................. 213
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 216
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 217
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 218
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 220
5.7 Vertical Navigation.............................................. 221
Altitude Constraints................................................... 223
5.8 Procedures............................................................ 227
Departures................................................................ 227
Arrivals .................................................................... 230
Approaches .............................................................. 232
5.9 Trip Planning......................................................... 238
Trip Planning............................................................. 238
5.10 RAIM Prediction................................................... 242
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan...................................... 245
5.12 Abnormal Operation............................................ 273
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SiriusXM Weather................................................. 276
Activating Services..................................................... 276
Using SiriusXM Weather Products............................... 277
WX-500 Stormscope............................................ 310
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 310
Selecting the Stormscope Page................................... 314
Terrain Proximity.................................................. 315
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data................................ 315
Terrain Proximity Page................................................ 318
Profile View Terrain.............................................. 320
Profile View Display................................................... 321
Terrain-SVS............................................................ 324
Displaying Terrain-SVS Data........................................ 325
Terrain-SVS Page....................................................... 327
Terrain-SVS Alerts...................................................... 329
TAWS-B.................................................................. 333
Displaying TAWS-B Data............................................. 334
TAWS-B Page............................................................ 337
TAWS-B Alerts........................................................... 339
System Status............................................................ 345
Traffic Information Service (TIS)......................... 347
Displaying TRAFFIC Data............................................ 348
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 350
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 351
System Status............................................................ 352
Avidyne TAS600 Traffic......................................... 355
TAS Symbology.......................................................... 355
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Displaying Traffic Data............................................... 356
Altitude Display......................................................... 357
Traffic Map Page Display Range.................................. 358
TAS Alerts................................................................. 359
System Status............................................................ 360
6.9 ADS-B Traffic......................................................... 362
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
(OPTIONAL)
7.1 AFCS Controls....................................................... 368
7.2 Flight Director Operation.................................... 370
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 370
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 371
Command Bars.......................................................... 372
Flight Director Modes................................................. 372
7.3 Vertical Modes...................................................... 373
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)................................................ 374
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)........................ 375
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)........................................... 376
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)........................................... 377
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC).................................. 378
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH, ALTV)...................... 379
Glidepath Mode (GP) (SBAS only)................................ 384
Glideslope Mode (GS)................................................ 386
Go Around Mode (GA)............................................... 387
7.4 Lateral Modes....................................................... 388
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)................................................ 389
Heading Select Mode (HDG)....................................... 390
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)....................... 391
Approach Modes (GPS, VAPP, LOC).............................. 393
7.5 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation.............. 395
Flight Control............................................................ 395
Engaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper..................... 396
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 396
Disengaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper................. 397
7.6 Example Flight Plan............................................. 398
Departure................................................................. 398
Intercepting a VOR Radial........................................... 400
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course.................................. 401
Descent.................................................................... 402
Approach.................................................................. 405
Go Around/Missed Approach...................................... 408
viii
7.7 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts.......................... 410
AFCS Status Alerts..................................................... 410
Overspeed Protection................................................. 412
Annunciations for KAP 140 Autopilot System............... 412
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Synthetic Vision System (SVS) (Optional).......... 414
SVS Operation........................................................... 415
SVS Features............................................................. 417
Field of View............................................................. 426
SafeTaxi................................................................. 428
ChartView (Optional)........................................... 434
ChartView Softkeys.................................................... 434
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 435
Chart Options............................................................ 443
Day/Night View......................................................... 449
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 451
FliteCharts............................................................. 454
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 454
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 455
Chart Options............................................................ 462
Day/Night View......................................................... 466
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 468
AOPA Airport Directory........................................ 471
AOPA Database Cycle Number and Revision................ 472
SiriusXM Satellite Radio (Optional)................... 474
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 474
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 476
Scheduler............................................................... 479
Flight Data Logging............................................. 481
Auxiliary Video (Optional)................................... 483
Video Setup.............................................................. 484
Display Selection....................................................... 484
Zoom/Range............................................................. 485
Abnormal Operation............................................ 486
SVS Troubleshooting.................................................. 486
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 486
Unusual Attitudes...................................................... 487
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts.............................................. 491
SVS Terrain Alerts....................................................... 510
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SVS Terrain Status Annunciations................................ 510
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) ALERTS.510
TAWS System Status Annunciations............................. 512
Database Management................................................. 513
Jeppesen Databases................................................... 513
Garmin Databases..................................................... 514
Glossary........................................................................... 521
Frequently Asked Questions......................................... 527
General TIS Information................................................ 531
Map Symbols.................................................................. 533
INDEX
Index .................................................................................I-1
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Blank Page
x
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) Section for details on the GFC 700 AFCS.
The G1000 Integrated Flight Deck System presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication,
and identification information using flat-panel color displays. The system is distributed across the following Line
Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1045 Multi Function Display (MFD) with GFC
700
• GIA 63/63W Integrated Avionics Units (IAU)
• GDC 74A Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver
• GSA 80 AFCS Yaw Damper Servo
• GSA 81 AFCS Servos (3)
• GSM 85 Servo Mounts (4)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Units (2)
• GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GMA 1347 Audio Panel with Integrated Marker
Beacon Receiver
• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder
EIS
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Multi
Function Display (MFD)
• GDL 90 ADS-B Data Link Transceiver
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs. Additional/optional equipment are shown in Figure 1-2.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Diamond DA42-L360 may be optionally equipped with a GFC 700 Automated Flight Control System
(AFCS), providing flight director (FD), autopilot (AP), and manual electric trim (MET) functions of the G1000
System.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDU 1040 or 1045 (2) – A GDU 1040 is configured as the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Multi Function
Display (MFD) for airframes equipped with the KAP 140. A GDU 1045 is used for airframes equipped with the
GIA 63W and GFC 700. Both displays feature 10.4-inch LCD screens with 1024 x 768 resolution. The displays
communicate with each other through a High-speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each display is
also paired with an Ethernet connection to an IAU.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
GDU 1040/1045
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GMA 1347 – The Audio Panel integrates navigation/communication radio (NAV/COM) digital audio, intercom,
and marker beacon controls, and is installed between the displays. This unit also provides manual control of
display Reversionary Mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP button; see Section 1.4, System Operation) and communicates
with both IAUs using an RS-232 digital interface.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GIA 63/63W (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communications hub, linking
all LRUs with the PFD. Each IAU contains a GPS receiver, a very high frequency (VHF) communication/
navigation/glideslope (COM/NAV/GS) receiver, and system integration microprocessors, and is paired with the
on-side display via an HSDB connection. The GIA 63W contains a GPS SBAS receiver. The IAUs are not paired
together and do not communicate with each other directly.
INDEX
APPENDICES
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved.
2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GDC 74A – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air temperature
(OAT) sensor. The ADC provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information to the
G1000 System, and it communicates with the primary IAU, displays, and AHRS using an ARINC 429 digital
interface.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GEA 71 – The Engine Airframe Units receive and process signals from the engine and airframe sensors. These
units communicate with both IAUs using RS-485 digital interfaces.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GTX 33 – The solid-state Transponder provides Modes A, C, and S capability and communicates with both IAUs
through an RS-232 digital interface.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GRS 77 (2) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to both the PFD and the primary IAU. The AHRS contains advanced sensors
(including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field
information, with the ADC to obtain air data, and with both IAUs to obtain GPS information. AHRS operation
is discussed in Section 1.4, System Operation.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GMU 44 – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing to
determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates with
it via an RS-485 digital interface.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• GDL 69/69A – The Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides real-time weather information to MFD maps
and the PFD Inset Map. The GDL 69A model is also capable of providing digital audio entertainment. The
Data Link Receiver communicates with the MFD via an HSDB connection. A subscription to XM Satellite Radio
Service is required to enable Data Link Receiver capability.
• GSA 80, GSA 81 and GSM 85 – The GSA servos automatically control pitch, pitch trim, roll and yaw for the
GFC 700. These units interface with each IAU.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The GSM 85 servo mounts are responsible for transferring the output torque of the servo actuators to the
mechanical flight-control surface linkages (not displayed in Figure 1-1).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GDL 90 (1) – A digital data link transceiver designed to transmit, receive and decode ADS-B messages. It
broadcasts aircraft position, velocity, projected track, altitude, and flight identification to other equipped aircraft
in the vicinity, as well as to FAA ground stations.
4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GDU 1045
GMA 1347
Multi Function Display
Audio Panel
Reversionary
Control
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reversionary
Control
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GDU 1040
Primary Flight Display
EIS
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
No. 1 GIA 63/63W
No. 2 GIA 63/63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
System Inegration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/SBAS
Glideslope
Flight Director (with AFCS option)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/SBAS
Glideslope
GRS 77
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AHRS
GPS Output
GPS Output
Attitude
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
GMU 44
Magnetometer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Heading
GTX 33
Transponder
#1 GEA 71
Autopilot Calculations
(optional)
GSA 81
Pitch Trim Servo
Autopilot Calculations
(optional)
GSA 81
Roll Servo
Autopilot Calculations
(optional)
GSA 80
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GSA 81
Pitch Servo
#2 GEA 71
Engine/Airframe
Unit
AFCS
Engine/Airframe
Unit
Yaw Damper Servo
Yaw Damper Calculations
(optional)
Figure 1-1 G1000 System Block Diagram
APPENDICES
NOTE: The GDU 1045 is available as the MFD in systems with a GIA 63W using the GFC 700 Automatic Flight
Control System.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
5
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
No. 2 GIA 63/63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/SBAS
Glideslope
Becker
RA 3502-(1)
ADF Receiver
(optional)
Honeywell
KN 63
DME
(optional)
L3
Stormscope
Lightning Strike and
Thunderstorm Detection
(optional)
GDL 69/69A
Data Link Receiver
Real-time Weather
Digital Audio Entertainment
(optional subscriptionbased service)
Avidyne
TAS600 Series
Honeywell
KAP 140
Traffic Advisory System
(optional)
Autopilot
(optional)
Garmin
GDL 90
ADS-B Traffic
(optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-2 G1000 With Optional/Additional Interfaces
NOTE: The GDU 1040 is available as the MFD in systems using the Honeywell KAP 140 Autopilot.
NOTE: For information on additional equipment shown in Figure 1-2, consult the applicable optional interface
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this additional
equipment.
6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.2 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Ensure the G1000 System is powered off before inserting an SD card.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix B for instructions on updating databases.
EIS
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the upper right side of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.
Installing an SD card:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
2) To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SD Card Slots
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-3 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 SYSTEM POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: See the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for specific procedures concerning avionics power application
and emergency power supply operation.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for system-specific annunciations and alerts.
EIS
The G1000 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features
that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs, and outputs to provide safe operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-4. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within the first minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also
become momentarily illuminated on the Audio Panel and the display bezels.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level”. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself
both while taxiing and during level flight.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the MFD powers up, the splash screen (Figure 1-5) displays the following information:
• System version
• Obstacle database name and version
• Copyright
• Terrain database name and version
• Land database name and version
• Aviation database name, version, and effective dates
Current database information includes valid operating dates, cycle number, and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the ENT Key (or right-most softkey) acknowledges this information, and the Navigation Map Page is
displayed upon pressing the key a second time. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to
determine a position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 1-4 PFD Initialization
8
Figure 1-5 Example MFD Power-up Splash Screen
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.4 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for detailed descriptions of all alerts and annunciations. Refer to the Aircraft
Flight Manual (AFM) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. As shown in
Figure 1-1, each IAU is connected to the on-side display. This allows the units to share information, enabling true
system integration
EIS
DISPLAY OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
can be adjusted from the remaining display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(EIS; see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-6 G1000 Normal Operation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
In the event of a display failure, the G1000 System automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
Reversionary Mode, all important flight information from the PFD is presented on the remaining display in the
same format as in normal operating mode, with the addition of the EIS. EIS operation while in Reversionary
Mode is discussed in the EIS Section. As when the PFD is operating normally, windows for flight planning,
nearest airports, and procedures are available. The Inset Map is moved to the right side of the display.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
9
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
If the system fails to detect a display problem, Reversionary Mode may be manually activated by pressing the
Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP Button. Pressing this button again deactivates Reversionary Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV1 and COM1 (provided by the
failed PFD) Flagged Invalid
DISPLAY BACKUP Button Manually Activates/
Deactivates Reversionary Mode on Both Displays
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-7 G1000 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing
failed data (Figure 1-8 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). The G1000 System alerts the pilot
when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Upon G1000 power-up, certain instruments remain invalid as
equipment begins to initialize. All instruments should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any
instrument remains flagged, the G1000 should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
GIA 63/63W
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
GRS 77
or GMU 44
GEA 71,
GIA 63/63W
or ECU
GDC 74A
APPENDICES
GIA 63/63W
GIA 63/63W
or DME/ADF
Source
INDEX
GIA 63/63W
GDC 74A
GTX 33 or GIA 63/63W
Figure 1-8 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the statuses, serial numbers, and software version numbers for all detected
system LRUs. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks; failed, by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted
and a service center or Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
Viewing LRU information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
EIS
a) Press the LRU Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-9 Example System Status Page
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed on this page. Refer to the Appendices and
Additional Features sections for more information about databases.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing database information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘Database’ Box,
a) Press the DBASE Softkey.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Select Dbase Window’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view database status information.
The G1000 uses aural tones to convey the priority of airframe-specific alerts. The alerting system’s annunciation
tone may be tested from the System Status Page. Refer to the Appendices for airframe-specific alerts.
Testing the system annunciation tone:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Press the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AHRS OPERATION
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) performs attitude, heading, and vertical acceleration
calculations for the G1000 System, utilizing GPS, magnetometer, and air data in addition to information
from its internal sensors. Attitude and heading information are updated on the PFD while the AHRS receives
appropriate combinations of information from the external sensor inputs.
unavailable
available
available
unavailable
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
le
ab
AHRS
no-GPS
Mode
ail
av
AHRS no- AHRS no-Mag/
Mag Mode
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
Air Data
un
available
unavailable
available
unavailable
available
Air Data
AHRS Normal
Operation
Magnetometer Data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Magnetometer Data
EIS
GPS Data
Attitude/Heading Invalid
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-10 AHRS Operation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts (refer
to Appendix A for specific AHRS alert information). Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in
loss of attitude and heading information (indicated by red ‘X’ flags over the corresponding flight instruments).
APPENDICES
Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses
the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as magnetometer and airspeed
data are available and valid.
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information; however, the
heading output on the PFD is flagged as invalid with a red ‘X’.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information.
Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and heading
information.
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Each Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Internal system checking is performed to
ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFD. When both GPS receivers are providing
accurate data, the GPS receiver producing the better solution is used by the system. Information collected by
the specified receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status
Page.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
EIS
1) Use the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.6 for information on
navigating MFD page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select GPS Status Page (third page in the AUX Page Group).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) To change the selected GPS receiver:
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
Satellite Signal
Information
GPS Receiver
Status
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
INDEX
APPENDICES
Satellite
Signal
Strength
Bars
Figure 1-11 GPS Status Page
14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In systems where the Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS) is enabled, GPS sensor annunciations are
most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has acquired satellites before the other or one
of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a SBAS signal. While the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal
may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also,
while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
GPS RECEIVER STATUS
EIS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is
in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D navigational GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS)
status should be indicated as INACTIVE at this point. When acquisition is complete, the solution status
changes to 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS becomes active.
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the EGNOS, MSAS (used only
in Japan), or WAAS coverage area, it may be desirable to disable EGNOS, MSAS, or WAAS (although it is not
recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in the GPS Status box indicates DISABLED. There may be a
small delay for the GPS Status box to be updated upon EGNOS, MSAS, or WAAS enabling/disabling.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Disabling EGNOS, MSAS, or WAAS
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
AFCS
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to hightlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’, or ‘WAAS’.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-12 SBAS Selection
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
RAIM PREDICTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
EIS
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time. In G1000
systems with SBAS enabled, performing RAIM prediction is not necessary in most cases. However, if the
selected approach is outside the SBAS coverage area, it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for
the intended approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
G1000 automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active”. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the missed approach
procedure must be flown.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Predicting RAIM availability:
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) Press the RAIM Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint and press the ENT Key (refer to Section 1.6 for instructions on data entry).
Or:
AFCS
a) To use the present position, press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
c) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
APPENDICES
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
INDEX
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SATELLITE INFORMATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a satellite constellation diagram.
This sky view is always oriented north-up, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle
representing 45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead. Each satellite
is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite identification
number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
EIS
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for SBAS) below each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is indicated by signal bar appearance:
• No signal strength bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Hollow signal strength bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data. Each satellite has a 30second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before the satellite may be
used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
• Solid signal strength bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Checkered signal strength bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion; FDE).
• “D” indication on signal strength bar—Satellite is being used for differential computations.
• Green signal strength bar—Satellites that are actually being used in the position calculation.
• Blue signal strength bar—Satellite is locked on but not yet being used in the position calculation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Using the current satellite signal information, the system calculates the aircraft’s GPS position, time, altitude,
ground speed, and track for the aircraft (displayed below the satellite signal accuracy measurements for
reference). The following quantities denote the accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix:
• Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU)—A statistical error indication; the radius of a circle centered on an
estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of lying
AFCS
• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)—Measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites
received and where they are relative to each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting
better accuracy
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Horizontal and Vertical Figures of Merit (HFOM and VFOM)—Measures of horizontal and vertical position
uncertainty; the current 95% confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS
receiver
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 G1000 CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and the
time required to access sophisticated functionality. Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and Audio
Panel. PFD and MFD controls and softkeys are discussed in this section. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information about Audio Panel and NAV/COM controls. AFCS controls (on the bezel of the MFD) are
described in the AFCS section.
EIS
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
10
13
11
14
12
15
AFCS
16
18
17
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-13 PFD/MFD Controls
The NAV, CRS/BARO, COM, FMS, and ALT knobs are concentric dual knobs, each having small (inner)
and large (outer) control portion. When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text, either may be used.
APPENDICES
Large (Outer) Knob
Small (Inner) Knob
INDEX
Figure 1-14 Dual Concentric Knob
18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NAV VOL/ID Knob Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a
percentage)
NAV Frequency
Transfer Key
3 NAV Knob
Heading Knob
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
Turn to manually select a heading
Joystick
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the Horizontal Situation
Indicator (HSI) and synchronize the Selected Heading to the and current heading
Turn to change map range
CRS/BARO Knob
Press to activate Map Pointer and move in desired direction to pan map
Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
EIS
5
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio on/off
Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2
4
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
Turn small knob to adjust course (only when HSI is in VOR or OBS Mode)
COM Knob
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly to bearing of active
waypoint/station
Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for
kHz)
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between COM1 and COM2
COM Frequency
Transfer Key
(EMERG)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies
11
FPL Key
12
CLR Key
(DFLT MAP)
MENU Key
14
PROC Key
15
ENT Key
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making
setting changes
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and
approach procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
Validates/confirms selection or data entry
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
13
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus
APPENDICES
Direct-to Key (
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on/off
) Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint
and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier,
chosen from the active route)
Displays flight plan information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
10
AFCS
Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz)
automatically into the active frequency field
9 COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM
Frequency Box)
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
16
Press to turn the selection cursor on/off
FMS Knob
(Flight Management Data Entry: With cursor on, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large
System Knob)
knob moves cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor
location)
EIS
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar
appears, indicating more items to view. With cursor on, turn large knob to scroll
through the list.
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a
page group; small knob selects a specific page from the group)
Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the PFD/MFD display
17
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkey Selection
Keys
18 ALT Knob
Sets the Selected Altitude, shown above the Altimeter (the large knob selects the
thousands, the small knob selects the hundreds)
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background. When a softkey function is disabled, the softkey
label is subdued (dimmed).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity.
AFCS
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)
Softkey
On
Softkey Names
(Displayed)
Figure 1-15 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In the following descriptions, top level softkeys are denoted with bullets.
PFD SOFTKEYS
APPENDICES
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and ALERTS softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on
gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected.
INDEX
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to the
previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).
20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PFD
OBS
CDI
(optional)
ADF/DME
XPDR
IDENT
TMR/REF
NRST
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INSET
ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
Figure 1-16 Top Level PFD Softkeys
EIS
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
INSET
DCLTR
(No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except
active
flight(optional)
plan
(optional)
(optional)
TRAFFIC
ALERTS
OFF
DCLTR
TOPO
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
BACK
TRAFFIC (2) Displays/removes traffic information on Inset Map
TRFC-1: Displays traffic on Inset Map.
Press the OFF or BACK Softkey
DCLTR-1
TRFC-1
TRFC-2:
Removes
everything except traffic. Inset Map
position
HDG softkeys.
UP only.
to return
to the top-level
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
Displays/removes
topographical
data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on Inset Map
TOPO
DCLTR-3
Displays/removes
terrain information on Inset Map
TERRAIN
(optional)
Displays/removes
weather
information
on TMR/REF
Inset Map
(optional)
STRMSCP
INSET
PFDStormscope
OBS
CDI
ADF/DME
XPDR
IDENT
NRST
ALERTS
Displays/removes NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Inset Map (optional)
NEXRAD
Displays/removes XM lightning information onPress
InsettheMap
(optional)
XM LTNG
CDI Softkey
to cycle through
navigation sources:
Displays METAR flags on airport symbols shown on- GPS
the Inset Map (optional)
METAR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• INSET
OFF
DCLTR (3)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
INSET
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
(optional) (optional) (optional) (optional)
OFF
DCLTR
TRAFFIC
DCLTR-1
TRFC-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
TOPO
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
METAR
BACK
ALERTS
APPENDICES
Press the OFF or BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
DCLTR-3
PFD
Figure 1-17 INSET Softkeys
INDEX
(optional)
METRIC
DFLTS
DME
BRG1
360 HSI
ARC HSI
BRG2
STD BARO
BACK
ALERTS
Press the BRG1/BRG2 softkeys to display/
190-01061-02 Rev. B
remove the Bearing Information windows
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond
DA42-L360
and cycle through bearing sources:
- NAV1/NAV2
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configuration
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision features (optional)
Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of
the active flight plan
SYN TERR Enables synthetic terrain depiction
HRZN HDG Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line
APTSIGNS Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the
current aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is
within approximately 9 nm.
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
DFLTS
Displays softkeys to select and configure wind data
WIND
Displays wind data in longitudinal and lateral components
OPTN1
Displays wind data total direction and speed
OPTN2
Displays wind data total direction with head and cross-wind speed components
OPTN3
Removes wind information from display
OFF
Displays/removes DME Information Window (optional)
DME
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through:
BRG1
NAV1: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
ADF: Waypoint frequency
Off: Removes window
Displays softkeys to select the HSI format
HSI FMT
Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
360 HSI
Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc (Bearing Information windows unavailable)
ARC HSI
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through:
BRG2
NAV2: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
ADF: Waypoint frequency
Off: Removes window
Displays softkeys for changing the Altimeter barometric setting and altitude displays to
ALT UNIT
metric units
Displays the current and Selected altitudes in meters in addition to feet, when selected
METERS
Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in inches of mercury (in Hg)
IN
Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in hectopascals (hPa)
HPA
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric display is selected)
STD BARO
Selects OBS Mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active leg)
• OBS
Cycles CDI through GPS, NAV1 (VOR/LOC), and NAV2 (VOR/LOC) navigation sources
• CDI
• ADF/DME
Displays/removes ADF/DME Radio Tuning Window (optional; may appear as ADF, DME,
or ADF/DME depending on installation)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• PFD
SYN VIS
PATHWAY
22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD
SYN VIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(optional)
(optional)
DFLTS
WIND
DME
BRG1
HSI FMT
ALT UNIT STD BARO
BRG2
BACK
ALERTS
OPTN1
OPTN2
OPTN3
OFF
METERS
ARC HSI
IN
HPA
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
360 HSI
BACK
EIS
Press the BRG1/BRG2
Press the STD BARO or BACK
softkeys to display/remove Softkey to return to the top-level
the Bearing Information
softkeys.
windows and cycle through
bearing sources:
- NAV1/NAV2
- GPS
- ADF
Figure 1-18 PFD Configuration Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
23
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• XPDR
STBY
ON
ALT
GND
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
VFR
CODE
0—7
BKSP
• IDENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• TMR/REF
• NRST
• ALERTS
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys:
Selects standby(optional)
mode (Transponder does not reply to any interrogations)
HSI FMT
BRG1
ALERTS
WIND
BACK
DFLTS
DME
ALT UNIT STD BARO
Selects Mode A (Transponder
repliesBRG2
to interrogations)
Selects Mode C – altitude reporting mode (Transponder replies to identification and altitude
Press the BRG1/BRG2
Press the STD BARO or BACK
interrogations)
softkeys to display/remove Softkey to return to the top-level
the Bearing Information
softkeys.
Manually selects Ground Mode
(Transponder
does not allow Mode A and Mode C
windows
and cycle through
bearing sources:
replies, but does permit acquisition
squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S
- NAV1/NAV2
interrogations)
- GPS
- ADF
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in U.S.A. only)
BACK
ALERTS
OFF
OPTN2
OPTN3
Displays OPTN1
transponder
code
selection
softkeys 0-7
Use numbers to enter code
360 HSI ARC HSI
BACK
ALERTS
Removes numbers entered, one
at a time
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
HPA
BACK
ALERTS
transponder return on the METERS
ATC screen IN
Displays/removes Timer/References Window
Displays/removes Nearest Airports Window
Displays/removes Alerts Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
XPDR
STBY
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
IDENT
BACK
ALERTS
AFCS
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
Press the IDENT or BACK
Softkey to return to the toplevel softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-19 XPDR Softkeys
24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
MFD softkeys vary depending on the page selected. EIS and Navigation Map Page (default MFD page)
softkeys are described here.
DCLTR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MAP
ENGINE
SHW CHRT CHKLIST
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
EIS
SYSTEM
FUEL
ENGINE
SYSTEM
FUEL
BACK
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENGINE
BACK
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
TOPO
(optional) (optional) (optional) (optional)
TERRAIN AIRWAYS STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG METAR LEGEND
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRAFFIC
BACK
Press the BACK softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
AIRWY ON
AIRWY LO
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AIRWY HI
ENGINE
DONE
EXIT
EMERGCY
The DONE Softkey label changes to UNDO
when the checklist item is already checked.
• ENGINE
Displays the Engine Page and top-level engine softkeys (see the EIS Section for
more information)
Displays the System Page
Displays the Fuel Page
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and fuel used
to zero
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
SYSTEM
FUEL
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
AFCS
Figure 1-20 EIS and MFD Softkeys
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Enables second-level Navigation Map Page softkeys
Displays/removes traffic information on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on Navigation
Map Page
Displays/removes terrain information on Navigation Map Page
TERRAIN
Selects the desired display of Airways; cycles through:
AIRWAYS
AIRWY ON: All Airways displayed
AIRWY LO: Low Altitude (Victor) Airways displayed
AIRWY HI: High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes) displayed
AIRWAYS: Airways are not displayed
STRMSCP Displays/removes Stormscope weather information on Inset Map (optional)
Displays/removes NEXRAD weather/coverage on Navigation Map Page (optional)
NEXRAD
XM LTNG Displays/removes XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Displays METAR flags on airport symbols shown on the Inset Map (optional)
METAR
Displays the legend for the selected weather products. Available only when
LEGEND
NEXRAD, XM LTNG, and/or METAR softkeys are selected.
Returns to top-level softkeys
BACK
• DCLTR (3) Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except the active flight plan
• SHW CHRT Displays optional Flite Charts or Chart View charts (optional)
Displays the Checklist Page
• CHKLIST
Selects the highlighted checklist item
DONE
Returns to the top-level softkeys
EXIT
EMERGCY Immediately accesses the emergency procedures
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• MAP
TRAFFIC
TOPO
26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.6 ACCESSING G1000 FUNCTIONALITY
MENUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to
the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when
there are no additional features or settings for the window/page selected.
EIS
Navigating a menu:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the
window/box when the option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) Press the CLR Key or FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
Options for FPL Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Options for
NRST Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-21 Page Menu Examples
AFCS
DATA ENTRY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The FMS Knob can be used for directly entering alphanumeric data (e.g., Flight ID, waypoint identifiers,
barometric minimum descent altitude) into the G1000 In some instances, such as when entering an identifier,
the G1000 tries to predict the desired identifier based on the characters being entered. In this case, if the
desired identifier appears, use the ENT Key to confirm the entry without entering the rest of the identifier
manually. This can save the pilot from having to enter all the characters of the identifier.
APPENDICES
Besides character-by-character data entry, the system also provides a shortcut for entering waypoint identifiers.
When the cursor is on a field awaiting entry of a waypoint identifier, turning the small FMS Knob counterclockwise accesses three different lists of waypoint identifiers for quick selection: flight plan (FPL), nearest
(NRST), and recently-entered (RECENT). The G1000 automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields
with the information for the selected waypoint.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Using the FMS Knob to enter data:
1) If needed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field.
3) Begin entering data.
a) To quickly enter a waypoint identifier, turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of waypoints
in the active flight plan (list is titled FPL). If desired, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to scroll through lists
of nearest waypoints (NRST) and recently-entered waypoints (RECENT).
EIS
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to select a character for the first placeholder.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turning the knob clockwise scrolls through the alphabet (where appropriate) toward the letter Z, starting at
K, and the digits zero through nine. Afterwards, turning the knob counter-clockwise scrolls in the opposite
direction.
b) Use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) Repeat, using the small FMS Knob to select a character and the large FMS Knob to move the cursor, until the
field is complete.
d) Press the ENT Key to confirm entry.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to cancel data entry (the field reverts back to its previous information).
28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
Active Page Title
EIS
Page Group
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. The page group and
active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom
right corner of the screen, the current page group, number of pages available in the group, and placement of
the current page within the group are indicated by icons. For some of these pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather
Information, XM, Procedure Loading), the title of the page changes while the page icon remains the same.
MFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Page Groups
Pages in Current Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Page
Figure 1-22 Page Title and Page Group Icons
There are four main page groups, navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary
depending on the configuration of optional equipment.
AFCS
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob until the desired page group is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob until the desired page is selected.
APPENDICES
There are also several pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information and XM pages) which are selected first
from within a main page group with the FMS Knob, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page
(or from the page menu). In this case, the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is
selected, even if a different page group is selected.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• Map Page Group (MAP)
Navigation Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map
Stormscope (optional)
XM Weather Data Link (optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain Proximity/TAWS
(TAWS optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-23 Map Pages
• Waypoint Page Group (WPT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages:
- Airport Information
(INFO Softkey)
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
AFCS
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
- Weather Information (optional)
(WX Softkey)
Intersection Information
Airport,
Procedures
and Weather
Information Pages
APPENDICES
NDB Information
VOR Information
Figure 1-24 Waypoint Pages
INDEX
User Waypoint Information
30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Auxiliary Page Group (AUX)
Trip Planning
Utility
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS Status
System Setup
XM Satellite Pages (optional):
- XM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
EIS
- XM Information
(INFO Softkey)
XM
Pages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
System Status
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-25 Auxiliary Pages
• Nearest Page Group (NRST)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
AFCS
Nearest User Waypoints
Nearest Frequencies
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest Airspaces
APPENDICES
Figure 1-26 Nearest Pages
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knob, there are pages for flight
planning (FPL) and loading procedures (PROC) which are accessed by key. In some instances, softkeys may be
used to access the Procedure Loading pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Plan pages are accessed using the FPL Key on the MFD. Main pages within this group are selected
by turning the small FMS Knob.
• Flight Plan Page Group (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
Flight Plan Catalog
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Stored Flight Plan
(NEW Softkey)
Figure 1-27 Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Procedure Loading pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu
is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading page is
opened. These pages can also be accessed from the Active and Stored Flight Plan pages using the LD softkeys.
Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure Loading pages (note the single page icon in the
lower right corner).
• Procedure Loading Page Group (PROC)
AFCS
Departure Loading
Arrival Loading
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach Loading
Figure 1-28 Procedure Loading Pages
INDEX
Information on optional electronic checklist pages is offered later in this section. Checklist pages may be
accessed from any page on the MFD using the CHKLIST Softkey.
32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM SETTINGS
G1000 system settings are managed from the System Setup Page. The following settings can be changed:
• Date/time
• Display Units
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• Baro Transition Alert (see Flight Instruments
Section)
• Airspace alerts (see Flight Management Section)
• Audio Alerts
• CDI scaling for GPS navigation source
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• COM channel spacing
(see Audio Panel and CNS Section)
• Criteria for displaying nearest airports
(see Flight Management Section)
EIS
• Arrival alerts (see Flight Management Section)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• MFD Data Bar Fields
(see Flight Management Section)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the DFLTS Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-29 System Setup Page
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DATE/TIME
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 obtains the current Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the AUX - GPS Status Page, Figure 1-11). System time (displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set
by adding/subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-30 System Time (Local 24-hr Format)
Configuring the system time:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The ‘Time
Offset’ field is highlighted.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
INDEX
Figure 1-31 Date/Time Settings (AUX - System Setup Page)
34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISPLAY UNITS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the G1000 screens are listed on the System Setup Page.
The Navigation Angle reference can be set from here (refer to the Flight Instruments Section).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-32 Display Unit Settings (AUX - System Setup Page)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
APPENDICES
Engine Indication System (EIS)
N/A
N/A
INDEX
Pounds
N/A
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’ All positions
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Position
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
AFCS
Fuel and
Fuel Flow
Weight
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Gallons
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Temperature
Exceptions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Category
Settings
Affected Quantities
Navigation Angle Magnetic (North) Heading
True (North)
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Distance and
Metric
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Speed
Nautical
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
Altitude and
Feet
All altitudes on MFD
Vertical Speed
Meters
All elevations on MFD
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (AUX - System Setup Page)
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PILOT PROFILES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected pilot
profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Splash Screen (Figure 1-5). The G1000 can store up to 25 profiles;
the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at
the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be created,
selected, renamed, or deleted.
Figure 1-33 Display Unit Settings (AUX - System Setup Page)
Creating a profile:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
APPENDICES
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key.
36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
Selecting an active profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The G1000 loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Renaming a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Deleting a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
APPENDICES
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TIMERS
The G1000 timers available include:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Stopwatch-like generic timers (available from the PFD Timer/References Window and on the MFD AUX Utility Page)
• Total-time-in-flight timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
• Time since departure (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
EIS
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero
on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are
zeroed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the generic timer (PFD):
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (hh/mm/ss).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
4) With the UP/DN field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) With ‘START?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘STOP?’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
8) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
9) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
PFD
INDEX
Figure 1-34 Generic Timer (Timer/References Window)
38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the generic timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page):
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a specific starting time is desired:
EIS
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-35 Timers (AUX - Utility Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled
from the System Setup Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the departure time:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SCHEDULER
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000’s Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Change oil”,
“Switch fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on a
specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.
APPENDICES
Figure 1-36 Scheduler (AUX - Utility Page)
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to ‘Type’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
EIS
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
9) For event-based messages:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
AFCS
Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD and cause the ALERTS Softkey label to change
to ‘ADVISORY’. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Alerts Window and acknowledges the scheduler
message. The softkey revers to the ‘ALERTS’ label and when pressed, the Alerts Window is removed from the
display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PFD
APPENDICES
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
Figure 1-37 PFD Alerts Window
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.7 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The backlighting of the PFD and MFD displays and bezel and Audio Panel keys can be adjusted automatically or
manually. The default setting (automatic backlighting adjustment) uses photocell technology to automatically adjust
for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize display appearance
through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. Manual backlighting adjustment can be accomplished using
the existing instrument panel dimmer bus or the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting
can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display.
EIS
Adjusting display backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2-4.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
AFCS
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ and repeat steps 4-7.
10) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
PFD
Figure 1-38 PFD Setup Menu
42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: If the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the backup
instruments.
Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instruments on the panel with an easyto-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic,
and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
EIS
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
– True airspeed
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Airspeed awareness ranges
– Navigation source
– Vspeed reference flags
– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
– Bearing pointers and information windows
• Altimeter, showing
– DME Information Window
• Transponder Mode, Code, and Ident/Reply
– Barometric setting
• Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
– Reference altitude
• Timer/References Window, showing
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators
– Generic timer
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
– Barometric minimum descent altitude (MDA)
– Vspeed values
AFCS
• Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Trend vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Turn Rate Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
– Indicated airspeed
• Wind data
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
21
20
19
1
18
17
16
2
EIS
15
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
14
3
13
4
12
5
11
6
10
7
9
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
1
NAV Frequency Box
12
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
13
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
True Airspeed
14
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Current Heading
15
Reference Altitude Bug
5
Current Track Indicator
16
Altimeter
6
Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)
17
Reference Altitude
7
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
18
COM Frequency Box
8
Softkeys
19
Navigation Status Box
9
System Time
20
Slip/Skid Indicator
10
Transponder Data Box
21
Attitude Indicator
11
Heading Bug
INDEX
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
44
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
11
1
10
9
EIS
8
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
6
5
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
Traffic Annunciation
7
Annunciation Window
2
Selected Heading
8
Selected Course
3
Inset Map
4
Bearing Information Windows
Vertical Deviation/Glideslope
Indicator
10 Marker Beacon Annunciation
5
Alerts Window
11
6
Barometric Minimum Descent
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
9
Terrain Annunciation
AFCS
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for airspeed criteria and Vspeed values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed is
displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving
tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at intervals of
five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 50 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated
airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer is black except when above the never-exceed speed
(VNE), the pointer is displayed in red.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
vYSE
Indicated
Airspeed
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
Vspeed
References
vMCA
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Speed
Ranges
AFCS
True
Airspeed
Airspeed Indicator, Operating Ranges
Red and White
Barber Pole at VNE
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator Ranges
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Color coded stripes appear on the Airspeed Indicator to show the operating ranges. The low speed range
stripe is red. Normal operating range is green, caution range is yellow, and the never exceed speed (VNE) begins
with a red and white barber pole. The flap operating range is indicated by a white stripe. A red bar represents
the one engine inoperative minimum control speed (VMCA), and a blue bar represents the one engine inoperative
best rate of climb speed (VYSE).
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line, extending up or down the airspeed scale to the right of
the speed range. The end of the trend vector indicates the predicted airspeed in six seconds if the current rate
of acceleration is maintained. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to
calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
46
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) for Vspeed values.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, VY,, VLE, and VLO) can be changed and their flags turned on/off from the Timer/
References Window. When active (on), the Vspeeds are displayed to the right of the airspeed scale. All Vspeed
values are reset and all flags turned off during power up.
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed flags on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field of the desired Vspeed to be changed.
EIS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired value. When a speed has been changed from a default value, an asterisk
appears next to the speed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Timer/References Window
Timer/References Menu
Figure 2-4 Timer/References Window and Menu
Turning all Vspeed flags on/off:
AFCS
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To activate all Vspeed flags, press the ENT Key with All References On highlighted.
4) To remove all Vspeed flags, turn the FMS Knob to highlight All References Off and press the ENT Key.
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
APPENDICES
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
8
1
7
EIS
2
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-5 Attitude Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. If the optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) is activated, the pitch scale is reduced to 10˚ up
and 7.5˚ down; refer to the Additional Features section for more information about SVS.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball
displacement on a traditional inclinometer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally
away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside the turn) is
indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
INDEX
Figure 2-6 Slip/Skid Indication
48
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTIMETER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
EIS
Setting the Selected Altitude:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude (large knob for 1000-ft increments, small knob for 100-ft
increments. If set to Metric mode, the large knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 500-meter increments; the
small knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 50-meter increments.
If the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) has been set, turning ALT Knob will also offer the
MDA/DH as a Selected Altitude setting.
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Barometric
Minimums
Bug
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
AFCS
Indicated
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
Bug
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude
Trend
Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altimeter Setting (In HG)
Altimeter Setting (Metric)
Figure 2-7 Altimeter Settings, In HG and Metric
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters (Figure 2-7). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
Displaying altitude in meters:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
EIS
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical navigation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent patch. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys..
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey.
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
AFCS
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
50
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude in either direction. This is displayed by the flashing light blue barometric pressure setting
when crossing the transition altitude. The flashing stops when the barometric pressure setting is changed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Altitude in the Baro Transition Alert box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the altitude and press the ENT Key.
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-8 Aux System Setup Page, Baro Transition Alert
APPENDICES
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels at 1000 and
2000 fpm and minor tick marks every 500 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate
is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the edge of the
tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL DEVIATION
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only shown for aircraft with GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units when
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS is available.
EIS
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical deviation when
Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute”
alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management
Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information
about VNV indications on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Glideslope Indicator appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the
active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional
indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is heard.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Full-scale deflection of two dots is 1000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LPV). When an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected navigation
source, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta diamond during the approach. If the approach type
downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is heard.
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
VNV Target
Altitude
AFCS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Glipepath
Indicator
Glideslope
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Vertical Speed and Deviation
Indicator (VSI and VDI)
APPENDICES
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
Glideslope Indicator
Glidepath Indicator
INDEX
Figure 2-9 Vertical Speed and Vertical Deviation Indications
52
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor tick
marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond. The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation,
bearing, and navigation source information. The HSI is available in two formats, a 360˚ compass rose and a
140˚ arc.
Changing the HSI display format:
EIS
1) Press the PFD Softkey
2) Press the HSI FRMT Softkey.
3) Press the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
14
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
15
13
1
12
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2
11
3
10
5
9
6
9
AFCS
4
8
7
9
Lateral Deviation Scale
2
Current Track Indicator
10
Flight Phase
3
To/From Indicator
11
Course Pointer
4
Navigation Source
12
Heading Bug
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
6
7
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Card
15
8
OBS Mode Active
APPENDICES
Turn Rate Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
Turn Rate and Heading
Trend Vector
14 Current Heading
Lubber Line
INDEX
Figure 2-10 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
combined To/From Indicator and a sliding deviation indicator, and a deviation scale. Upon station passage, the
To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like a conventional To/From flag. Depending
on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two different ways, an arrowhead (GPS, VOR,
OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Course Pointer Track Indicator
Navigation
Source
Flight Phase
Annunciation
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
Course
Deviation
and To/From
Indicator
Figure 2-11 Arc HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The selected heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted. The light blue
heading bug on the compass rose corresponds to the selected heading. While the HSI is displayed as an arc, if
the heading bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose, the digital reading is displayed.
Adjusting the selected heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the selected heading.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted. While the
HSI is displayed as an arc, the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140˚
currently shown.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
AFCS
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.
Current Heading
Heading Bug
APPENDICES
Selected
Heading
Selected
Course
INDEX
Figure 2-12 Heading and Course Indications (Magnetic)
54
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 2-13 Heading and Course Indications (True)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Nav Angle in the Display Units box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• TRUE - References angles to true north (T)
• MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-14 System Setup Page, Navigation Angle Settings
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TURN RATE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than 4
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
EIS
Half-standard
Turn Rate
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Standard
Turn Rate
Figure 2-15 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV, GPS, and ADF
sources by pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG or DME Softkey. The bearing pointers are light blue and are
single-line (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information windows to indicate
the navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI
by a white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
Tuning Mode
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 2
Pointer
AFCS
Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Distance to
Bearing Source
Station
Identifier
ADF
Frequency
Bearing Source Pointer 1
Pointer 2
APPENDICES
Bearing 1 Information Window
Bearing Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
INDEX
Figure 2-16 HSI with Bearing and Distance Information
56
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information Windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following information:
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double
line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF)
EIS
• Frequency (ADF)
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and NO DATA is displayed in the information window if
the NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not
selected.
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
NOTE: DME radio installation is optional.
AFCS
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window on the 360˚ HSI and in
a box above and along side the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD),
frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by –.– – NM Refer to the Audio
Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DMEs.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window.
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
NOTE: During a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the CDI on the Arc HSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
EIS
360º HSI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
Arc HSI
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
CDI
CDI
Scale
Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Crosstrack
Error
CDI
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-17 Course Deviation Indicator
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. The color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPSderived distance when navigating GPS. When navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the
same angular deviation as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
INDEX
Figure 2-18 Navigation Sources
58
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the light blue tuning box over the
NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the light blue tuning
box over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NOTE: KAP 140 equipped aircraft only: Each time the CDI Softkey is pressed or the navigation source
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
EIS
changes, a message appears (“NAV Source Changed – Select Desired Autopilot Mode”), regardless of
whether or not the autopilot is engaged.
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
LOC1
Selected
LOC2
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CDI Softkey
Cycles Through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-19 Selecting a Navigation Source
AFCS
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
APPENDICES
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. GPS steering guidance is not
provided after the switch.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GPS CDI SCALING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, HDG LEG is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
EIS
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly
and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Selected in the GPS CDI box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
Figure 2-20 AUX-System Setup Page, GPS CDI Settings
INDEX
APPENDICES
When set to Auto (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-21, Table 2-1).
60
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
Terminal
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Departure
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Missed
Approach
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-21 Automatic CDI Scaling
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
AFCS
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm; except under the following conditions:
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
APPENDICES
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (Figures 2-22 and 2-23). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is activated or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2 nm
FAF
Landing
Threshold
EIS
FAF
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
angle based
on database
information
course width
2 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
angle set
by system
350 ft
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
1.0 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-22 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
Figure 2-23 Typical LNAV/VNAV and LPV Approach CDI Scaling
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
APPENDICES
Approach
(Non-precision with
Vertical Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (Figure 2-22)
LNAV + V
L/VNAV
LPV
MAPR
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (Figure 2-23)
0.3 nm
INDEX
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
62
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current Active-to waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. OBS is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
EIS
While OBS is enabled, a course line is drawn through the Active-to waypoint on the moving map. If
desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight plan on the moving map retains the modified course line.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Figure 2-24 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol in place of OBS and the OBS
Softkey label changes to SUSP. Pressing the SUSP Softkey resumes automatic sequencing of approach
waypoints.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-25 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
64
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Pressing the DFLTS Softkey turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset Map and wind data display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
EIS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F) as selected by the
pilot, in the lower left of the PFD under normal display conditions. Temperature is displayed below the true
airspeed in reversionary mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Normal Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reversionary Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-26 Outside Air Temperature
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Changing temperature display units:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD using the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the TEMP field in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight either CELSIUS or FAHRENHEIT and press the ENT Key to confirm the
selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-27 AUX-System Setup Page, Temperature Selection
66
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WIND DATA
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
EIS
Option 1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-28 Wind Data
Displaying/removing wind data:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey to show wind data display options.
3) Press one of the OPTN softkeys to choose how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Wind direction arrows with headwind/tailwind and crosswind components
AFCS
• OPTN 2: Wind direction arrow and speed
• OPTN 3: Total wind direction with headwind or tailwind and crosswind speed components
• OFF: Removes the wind data window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in the table.
Top of Descent Message
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Required
Vertical Speed
Indicator
GPS is the
Selected
Navigation
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Phase of
Flight
AFCS
Figure 2-29 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VNV Indication Removed
Criteria
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD and not on a descent leg
X
X
X
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
X
Last altitude-constrained waypoint in active flight plan reached
X
X
(30 sec before)
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
68
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
SYSTEM ALERTING
EIS
Messages appear in the Alerts Window in the lower right corner of the PFD when a warning, caution, advisory
alert, or G1000 message advisory occurs. System alert messages are provided for awareness of G1000 system
problems or status and may or may not require pilot action. The Alerts Window allows system alerts to be
displayed simultaneously. The FMS Knob is used to scroll through the alert messages. The Alerts Window
is enabled/disabled by pressing the ALERTS Softkey. If the window is already open when a new message is
generated, pressing the ALERTS Softkey to acknowledge the message turns the softkey gray.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ALERTS Softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when an alert is issued. The
annunciation flashes and the appropriate aural alert sounds until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. The
softkey then reverts to the ALERTS label, and when pressed again opens the Alerts Window to display a
descriptive message of the alert.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Annunciation Window appears to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator and displays abbreviated
annunciation text for aircraft alerts. Warnings appear in red, cautions in yellow, advisory alerts in white,
and safe operating annunciations in green. New alerts are displayed at the top of the Annunciation Window,
regardless of priority. Once acknowledged, they are sequenced based on priority.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Annunciation
Window
Alerts
Window
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkey
Annunciations
Figure 2-30 G1000 Alerting System
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in yellow, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
EIS
Outer Marker
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altimeter
Figure 2-31 Marker Beacon Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
Traffic is displayed symbolically on the PFD Inset Map, the MFD Navigation Map Page, and various other
MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix F for more details about the Traffic
Information Service (TIS) and optional Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS). When a traffic advisory (TA) is detected,
the following automatically occur:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled and displays traffic
• A flashing black-on-yellow TRAFFIC annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator for five
seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
• A single “TRAFFIC” aural alert is heard, unless an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed. Refer
to the applicable TAS documentation for alerts generated by TAS equipment.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If additional TAs appear, new aural and visual alerts are generated.
Traffic
Symbols
APPENDICES
PFD Traffic Annunciation
PFD Inset Map with TAS Traffic Displayed
INDEX
Figure 2-32 Traffic Annunciation and Inset Map with Traffic Displayed
70
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Alerting provides the pilot with a visual alert when approaching the Selected Altitude. Whenever the
Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is independent of the GFC 700
AFCS, but alerting tones are heard only when the GFC 700 is installed. The following occur when approaching
the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes
to black text on a light blue background and flashes for 5 seconds.
EIS
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to light blue
text on a black background and flashes for 5 seconds.
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude) an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background and
flashes for 5 seconds.
Deviation of ±200 ft
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-33 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: A Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available and Terrrain-SVS alerting has
been inhibited.
AFCS
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow LOW ALT annunciation appears to the top right of the Altimeter, flashing
for several seconds, then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-34 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH) can be set
in the Timer/References Window and is reset when the power is cycled. When active, the altitude setting is
displayed to the bottom left of the Altimeter. Once the altitude is within the range of the tape, a bug appears at
the reference altitude on the Altimeter. The following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/
DH:
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the BARO MIN box appears
with the altitude in light blue text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in light blue once in range.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums. Minimums”,
is heard.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
White Within 100 ft
Yellow When Altitude Reached
EIS
Light Blue Within 2500 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Barometric
Minimum
Box
Figure 2-35 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
Setting the barometric Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height and bug:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO. Off is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS
Knob to highlight the next field.
AFCS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude from zero to 16,000 feet.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
Figure 2-36 Barometric MDA/DH
INDEX
APPENDICES
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the MDA.
If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA, once it reaches 50 feet above the MDA, alerting
is disabled.
72
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations listed in the table can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur. Refer to
the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
LOI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DR
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
EIS
INTEG OK
Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-37 Example HSI Annunciations
AFCS
In Dead Reckoning Mode the CDI is removed from the display when GPS is the selected navigation source.
The following items on the PFD are then shown in yellow:
• Current Track Bug
• Wind Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Distances in the Bearing Information Windows
• GPS bearing pointers
APPENDICES
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode, as they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Nose Low
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Nose High
Figure 2-38 Pitch Attitude Warnings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD and their softkeys are disabled when the aircraft experiences
unusual attitudes:
• Traffic Annunciations
• System Time
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height Readout
• AFCS Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• Inset Map
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
– Timer/References
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• Wind Data
– Nearest Airports
• Selected Altitude
• Selected Heading Readout
– Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
• Selected Course Readout
– Messages
• Transponder Status Box
– Procedures
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• Flight Director Command Bars
74
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 Engine Indication System (EIS) for the Diamond DA42-L360 displays critical engine, electrical,
fuel, and other system parameters on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations
(Figure 3-1).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-1 Multi Function Display (Normal)
EIS information is presented in three displays, accessed using the ENGINE Softkey on the MFD:
AFCS
• Engine Display – Default display, shows all critical engine, fuel, and electrical indicators
• Lean Display – Provides engine leaning information
• System Display – Shows numeric readouts of critical engine, electrical, and fuel indicators
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The manifold pressure indicator and tachometer are present on all displays.
APPENDICES
The EIS instrument types include vertical slider gauges, horizontal bar indicators, and digital readouts. Green
bands indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate caution and warning, respectively.
When unsafe operating conditions occur, readouts and labels may change color corresponding to the level of the
condition. The pointers (labeled left, L, and right, R) on the horizontal bar indicators appear in white to indicate
normal operation and change to yellow or red to indicate caution or warning conditions.
If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is shown across the instrument.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In reversionary mode, the reversionary display is configured to present PFD symbology with the EIS Display
(Figure 3-2). When the G1000 displays enter reversionary mode, each EIS Display (Engine, Lean, System)
and the softkey functionality remains the same (refer to the System Overview for information about display
Reversionary Mode).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-2 Primary Flight Display (Reversionary Mode)
76
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Engine softkeys provide access to the three EIS Displays (Engine, Lean, System). To return to the Engine
Display from the Lean or System Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
ENGINE
SYSTEM
BACK
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
CYL SLCT
ASSIST
BACK
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
BACK
EIS
LEAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-3 EIS Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ASSIST
• SYSTEM
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
Displays second-level engine softkeys
Displays the EIS Lean Display
Cycles through the cylinders to obtain information about a particular cylinder, shown in
light blue on the bar graphs
Accesses Leaning Assist Mode
Displays the EIS System Display
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and fuel used to zero
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• ENGINE
• LEAN
CYL SLCT
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 ENGINE DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Fuel Quantity Indicator shows 25 gallons of fuel per side in the main tanks when full; the Fuel
Quantity Indicator does not account for fuel in the auxiliary tanks.
EIS
The Engine Display is the default EIS display and can be selected by pressing the ENGINE or BACK Softkey
when another EIS display is currently shown. Beneath the vertical slider gauges are readouts for fuel flow and
horizontal bar indicators for cylinder head temperature, oil temperature and pressure, alternator load, bus voltage,
and fuel quantity.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAN IN Hg)
2 Tachometer (RPM)
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate
engine power
Displays propeller speeds in revolutions per minute (rpm) on a vertical
slider gauge with digital readouts below the gauge
Digital readouts flash red to indicate an overspeed warning.
3
Displays digital readouts of current fuel flow for each engine in gallons
per hour (gph)
Displays the head temperature of the hottest cylinder (number shown in
triangular pointer) for each engine in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
Displays engine oil temperature ranges in °F
7
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FUEL FLOW GPH)
Cylinder Head Temperature
Indicator (CHT)
Oil Temperature Indicator
(OIL TEMP)
Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PRES)
Ammeter (AMPS)
8
Voltmeter (VOLTS)
Displays the primary bus voltage for each side in volts
9
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)
Displays the quantity, in gallons (gal), of fuel in the tanks; pointers
labeled L and R indicate the fuel quantity in each tank
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5
AFCS
6
Displays engine oil pressure ranges in pounds per square inch (PSI)
Displays each alternator load in amperes (amps)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Indicator ranges from 0 to 25 gal per side with tick marks every 5 gal;
the red range indicates 1 gal of unusable fuel.
78
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
EIS
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
7
AFCS
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9
Figure 3-4 Engine Display
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.2 LEAN DISPLAY
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures as described in
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM).
The Lean Display (Figure 3-5) is accessed by pressing the ENGINE Softkey followed by the LEAN Softkey and
provides information for performing engine leaning.
EIS
Manifold Gauge, Tachometer and Fuel Flow Indicator remain on the Lean Display. Exhaust Gas Temperature
(EGT) and Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) are displayed graphically with numeric readouts for the selected
cylinder for each engine.
Accessing the EIS Lean Display:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the LEAN Softkey.
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
From the Lean Display, the CYL SLCT and ASSIST Softkeys can be utilized to obtain information about
specific cylinders on both the EGT and CHT graphs. The CYL SLCT Softkey is disabled during warning or
caution conditions or when the ASSIST Softkey is pressed.
Monitoring the desired cylinder’s EGT and CHT:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
From the Lean Display, press the CYL SLCT Softkey to cycle through each cylinder and view its EGT and CHT.
The selected cylinder is shown in light blue.
The ASSIST Softkey aids in the leaning process by identifying the peak of the first cylinder whose temperature
falls. The peaked cylinder is selected and a hollow light blue box appears above the cylinder’s bar to indicate EGT
peak. A readout showing the temperature deviation from peak (DPEAK) is displayed above the EGT bar graph.
If the temperature of the peaked cylinder exceeds the peak value, the peak value is not updated.
AFCS
Lean the fuel mixture for the desired engine until the first cylinder peaks. Enrich the mixture until the DPEAK
displays the desired value. This process is performed for each engine.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Monitoring of the cylinder continues until the ASSIST Softkey is pressed again which disables lean assist and
removes the peak line from the bar graph and the DPEAK. The system then returns to seeking the cylinder head
with the highest temperature.
APPENDICES
1
2
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FUEL FLOW GPH)
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate
engine power
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band
indicates propeller overspeed
Displays digital readouts of current fuel flow for each engine in gallons
per hour (gph)
INDEX
3
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAN IN Hg)
Tachometer (RPM)
80
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
The number of the cylinder with the highest Exhaust Gas Temperature
(EGT) is highlighted in light blue and its readout given below the bar
graph in degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
A hollow light blue box appears above the cylinder’s bar to represent
the peak EGT for the selected cylinder when the ASSIST Softkey is
pressed.
The EGT deviation from peak (DPEAK) for the selected cylinder is
displayed below the indicator when the ASSIST Softkey is pressed
Cylinder Head Temperature The number of the cylinder with the highest head temperature is
highlighted in light blue and its readout given below the bar graph in
Bar Graph (CHT °F)
°F.
A caution or warning condition is denoted by color change of a cylinder’s
bar to yellow or red, respectively.
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Bar Graph (EGT °F)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
81
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
EIS
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5
INDEX
Figure 3-5 Lean Display
82
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.3 SYSTEM DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the SYSTEM Softkey to access the System Display (Figure 3-6). The instruments presented here, in
addition to the engine manifold pressure indicator and tachometer, are separated into four categories: System
(voltmeter, ammeter, and flight hours), Oil (temperature and pressure), Fuel (capacity and flow), and Fuel Calc
(gallons remaining/used, endurance, and range). A horizontal bar indicator for deice fluid (optional) is located
at the bottom of the display.
Accessing the EIS System Display:
EIS
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the SYSTEM Softkey.
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
3
Voltmeter (VOLTS)
Displays the primary bus voltage for each side with digital readouts
4
Ammeter (AMPS)
Displays each alternator load in amperes (amps) with digital readouts
5
Flight Hours (FLT HRS)
Displays the total flight hours and is activated when the aircraft becomes
airborne (note that time airborne is separate from tachometer time)
6
Oil Temperature Indicator (°F) Displays the oil temperature of each side in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
7
Oil Pressure Indicator (PSI)
9
Fuel Flow Indicator (GPH)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate
engine power
Displays propeller speeds in revolutions per minute (rpm) on a vertical
slider gauge with digital readouts below the gauge
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAN IN Hg)
2 Tachometer (RPM)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
AFCS
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engines in pounds per square
inch (psi)
8 Fuel Quantity Indicator (GAL) Displays a digital readout of fuel in the tanks in gallons (gal)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Displays a digital readout of current fuel flow for each engine in gallons
per hour (gph)
10 Set Fuel Remaining (GAL REM) Displays current fuel remaining (gal) as set by the pilot and adjusted
for fuel burn based on fuel flow since last set
11 Calculated Fuel Used
Displays quantity of fuel used (gal) based on fuel flow since last reset
(GAL USED)
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
12
Displays flight time remaining (HH:MM) based on the calculated fuel
remaining and current fuel flow
Displays aircraft range in nautical miles (nm) based on the calculated
fuel remaining and current fuel flow
Displays the quantity of deice fluid; tick marks are located at quarter
intervals
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Calculated Endurance
(ENDUR)
13 Calculated Range
(RANGE NM)
14 Deice Fluid Indicator
(DEICE FLUID) (Optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
5
AFCS
6
7
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9
10
11
APPENDICES
12
13
14
INDEX
Figure 3-6 System Display
84
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL CALCULATIONS
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
NOTE: The fuel remaining can be adjusted up to a maximum of 76.4 gal; the Fuel Quantity Indicator does
not account for fuel in the auxiliary tanks.
EIS
Fuel calculations are based on the fuel flow totalizer and the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM), adjusted by
the pilot using the following softkeys:
• DEC FUEL – Decreases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
• INC FUEL – Increases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• RST FUEL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining (GAL REM) relative to the aircraft’s fuel capacity and sets the
displayed fuel used (GAL USED) to zero
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
From the System Display, press the DEC FUEL or INC FUEL Softkey to obtain the desired number of gallons
remaining (GAL REM).
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
From the Fuel Display, press the RST FUEL Softkey. This resets the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) to 76.4
gallons. The fuel used (GAL USED) is reset to zero.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-7 System Display, Fuel Calculations
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
85
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Blank Page
86
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in Diamond DA42-L360 aircraft is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Audio Panel
• Multifunction Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
receiver, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and reply status (Figure 4-1).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
87
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD/PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
12
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 MFD/PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and ADF/DME Tuning Window (PFD Shown)
88
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
ADF/DME Tuning Window – Displays ADF frequencies, volume setting, and modes, and DME tuning
selection. Display by pressing the ADF/DME Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms an ADF frequency or ADF/DME mode and Auto-tune selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, enter ADF frequencies,
select ADF/DME modes, and Auto-tune entries when ADF/DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is
present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in
the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the transponder.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
13
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
22
23
17
24
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
90
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Not used in DA42-L360 aircraft.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in DA42-L360 aircraft.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate SQ. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio is played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded block.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL
or SQ. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.
AFCS
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TEL – Not used in DA42-L360 aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM 1/2 – Split COM Key. Allows simultaneous transmission on COM1 and COM2 by the pilot and copilot.
EIS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 – Not used in DA42-L360 aircraft.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: During PA Mode, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the COM active frequency color
changes to white, indicating that neither COM transmitter is active.
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
EIS
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and the
two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the
COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio is muted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM
radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning
box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
Top Section of
the Audio Panel
AFCS
Tuning Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM2 Radio is Selected
on the Audio Panel
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
92
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Entertainment audio, if selected, is muted during active COM radio reception. Refer to
Additional Audio Panel Functions later in this section, and details on the Data Link Receiver in the Additional
Features Section.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Transmit and
Receive Indicators
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AFCS
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
APPENDICES
Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
EIS
Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One COM Radio to the Other
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-6 Switching COM Tuning Boxes
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press for Two Seconds to
Load 121.500 MHz
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-7 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
94
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS, WX)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
EIS
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Press the NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest
Airports Window
Figure 4-8 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-9, 4-10, and 4-11).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-11).
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Figure 4-9 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
AFCS
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
96
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press Frequency
Transfer Key to Load
Frequency into COM
Active Frequency Field
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Runway
Information
Press INFO Softkey for
AIRPORT, RUNWAYS,
and FREQUENCIES
Windows
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-11 WPT – Airport Information Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press ENT Key to Load
Frequency into COM
Standby Field. Cursor
then Advances to
Next Frequency.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-12 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
98
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENCY SPACING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing
is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
EIS
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-13 COM Channel Spacing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the G1000 softkeys are blank.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
AUX - SYSTEM
SETUP PAGE
INDEX
Figure 4-14 AUX – System Setup Page
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
EIS
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.
Figure 4-15 Overriding Automatic Squelch
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOLUME
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM Volume
Level Remains for
Two Seconds
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-16 COM Volume Level
100
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are
placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Active
Fields
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby
Fields
Tuning Box
AFCS
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Pressing
the CDI Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-17 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
APPENDICES
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over
the headset and the speaker (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-18 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
AFCS
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-19 NAV Frequency Tuning
102
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One NAV Radio to the Other
EIS
Figure 4-20 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Morse Code Identifier
for the GHM VOR is On
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 with the small
NAV Knob and press the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
Station
Identifier
Figure 4-21 NAV Radio ID Indication
AFCS
VOLUME
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
APPENDICES
NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
Figure 4-22 NAV Volume Levels
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
EIS
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-23, 4-24, and 4-25).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency (Figure 4-25).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
AFCS
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
104
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-24 Nearest Pages Menus
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the VOR
Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the
VOR Identifier
Press the FREQ
Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the
VOR Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-25 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
106
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-26 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated while navigating by GPS, the system automatically
switches to LOC as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight
Management Section for details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
EIS
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 active
frequency field. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 active frequency field is transferred to
standby.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
108
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Middle Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
EIS
Outer Marker
Indication
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-27 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-28 Marker Beacon Keys
AFCS
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations (Figure 4-27). The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The
MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker
beacon signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while
marker beacon audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
APPENDICES
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF/DME TUNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the ADF/DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
The G1000 system tunes the ADF receiver (optional) and DME transceiver (optional). The ADF is tuned by
entering the frequency in the ADF standby frequency field of the ADF/DME Tuning Window. (The softkey may
be labeled ADF/DME, ADF, or DME, depending on installed equipment.)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following ADF/DME information is displayed in the ADF/DME Tuning Window:
• Active and standby ADF frequencies
• ADF receiver mode
• ADF receiver volume
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
When the ADF/DME Tuning Window is displayed, the selection cursor is placed over the standby ADF
frequency field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turning the large FMS Knob moves the selection cursor through the various fields (standby ADF frequency,
ADF receiver mode, ADF radio volume, and DME tuning mode). Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates
the selection cursor in the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The ADF frequency is entered using the FMS Knob and
the ENT Key.
AFCS
Active ADF Frequency
Standby ADF Frequency
ADF
Mode
ADF
Volume
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DME
Tuning
Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-29 ADF/DME Tuning Window
110
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF TUNING
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field of the
ADF/DME Tuning Window. The G1000 System does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0‑kHz.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Tuning an ADF frequency:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin data entry and change each digit.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next digit position.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete data entry for the standby frequency.
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Data in
the Standby ADF
Frequency Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete ADF
Frequency Entry
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Character
Figure 4-30 Entering ADF Standby Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the CLR Key before completing frequency entry cancels the frequency change and reverts back to
the previously entered frequency.
Pressing the CLR Key when the cursor is flashing, clears the frequency and replaces the standby field with
0000.0.
AFCS
Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
2) Press the ENT Key to complete the frequency transfer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the ENT
Key to Transfer
the ADF
Frequencies
APPENDICES
Figure 4-31 Transferring ADF Frequencies
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING ADF RECEIVER MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
audio.
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by selecting the ADF Key on
the Audio Panel.)
• ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
EIS
• ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF mode field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired ADF receiver mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the Small
FMS Knob
to Select the
Mode
Figure 4-32 Selecting ADF Receiver Mode
AFCS
ADF receiver volume level can be adjusted in the tuning window from 0 to 100%. The default volume level
is set to 50%. The ADF volume level is the same for both Audio Panels.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting ADF receiver volume:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF volume field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust volume as desired.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Turn the Small
FMS Knob
to Select the
Volume
Figure 4-33 Adjusting ADF Receiver Volume
112
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME TUNING
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The DME transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
EIS
DME
Modes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-34 ADF/DME Tuning Window, DME Modes
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
AFCS
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the data entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTX 33 Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
EIS
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
AFCS
When the CODE Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters the
transponder code. If an error is made, the code selection cursor can be moved back to the left one digit with
each press of the BKSP Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on the PFD. Code entry must be completed with either the
softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
APPENDICES
Pressing the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
INDEX
After 45 seconds of transponder softkey inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
114
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
IDENT
BACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ON
IDENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
STBY
XPDR
ALERTS
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BKSP
IDENT
BACK
ALERTS
EIS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-35 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
GROUND MODE
AFCS
Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground. The transponder
powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down. Ground Mode can be overridden by pressing any one
of the Mode Selection Softkeys. A green GND indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of
the Transponder Data Box. In Ground Mode, the transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies,
but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When Standby Mode has been selected on the ground, the transponder can be returned to Ground Mode
by pressing the GND Softkey.
GND
Mode
APPENDICES
Figure 4-36 Ground Mode
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder does
not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is selected, a white STBY indication
and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In all other modes, these fields
appear in green.
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inoperative.
EIS
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-37 Standby Mode
MANUAL ON MODE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder
code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-38 ON Mode
116
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
EIS
Figure 4-39 Altitude Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reply to
Interrogation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-40 Reply Indication
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
EIS
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Pressing the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entering
a Code
Figure 4-41 Entering a Code
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
AFCS
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-42 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
118
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VFR CODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
VFR Code
EIS
Figure 4-43 VFR Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is pressed, a green IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After the IDENT Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
IDNT
Indication
AFCS
Press the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
Figure 4-44 IDENT Softkey and Indication
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
center for configuration.
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed in the Timer/References
Window on the PFD. The Flight ID is not to exceed seven characters. No space is needed when entering
Flight ID. When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight
ID entry.
EIS
Entering a Flight ID:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey to display the Timer/References Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor, if not already activated.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If an error is made during Flight ID entry, pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry. While
entering a Flight ID, turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent
of rotation. If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct Flight ID
using the same procedure.
Flight ID
PFD Entry
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-45 Timer/References Window, Entering Flight ID
120
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-46 Passenger Address and Speaker Keys
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) for the pilot, copilot and up to two passengers.
The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and aircraft radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 4-47 Intercom Controls
PILOT KEY
Annunciator
COPLT KEY
Annunciator
Pilot Hears
Copilot Hears
Passenger Hears
OFF
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, copilot, passengers
ON
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot
Copilot, passengers
Copilot, passengers
OFF
ON
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot;
passengers
Copilot
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, passengers
ON
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Passengers
AFCS
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts, and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.
APPENDICES
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.
INDEX
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.
122
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by
the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting.
EIS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob
controls only the volume (pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls
either volume or squelch (selected by pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ
annunciation).
Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
Automatic/Manual Squelch
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot Volume or Manual
Squelch. Press to switch
between VOL and SQ. Turn
to adjust Squelch when SQ
Annunciation is lit, Volume
when VOL Annunciation is lit.
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Volume Annunciation
AFCS
Squelch Annunciation
Figure 4-48 Volume/Squelch Control
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. When the PA
Key is selected on the Audio Panel, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished, and the active COM frequency
changes to white, indicating that there is no COM selected. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA
announcements. The PA Annunciator flashes about once per second while the PTT is depressed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
PA Key is Selected on
the Audio Panel
Figure 4-49 PA Key Selected for Cabin Announcements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest
block.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. The PLAY Annunciator flashes to indicate when play is in progress. The PLAY Annunciator turns off
after the present memory block has finished playing.
AFCS
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each
subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
APPENDICES
MKR/MUTE
Key Stops Play
PLAY Key
Controls the
Play Function
INDEX
Figure 4-50 Marker Mute and Play Keys
124
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SPLIT COM
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
EIS
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. COM1 and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the annunciator
is extinguished.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM1 Radio is Used
by the Pilot
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-51 Split COM Operation
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
APPENDICES
XM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
XM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
(optional: requires subscription to XM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
details on the Data Link Receiver.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
EIS
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the G1000 System, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well
as preventing pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys
Pilot Volume
or Manual
Squelch
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Squelch
Annunciation
AFCS
Volume
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-52 Audio Panel Controls
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
APPENDICES
2) Verify that manual squelch is set to full open.
3) Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs clockwise two full turns. This sets the headset audio level to max volume (least
amount of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT/PASS Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
INDEX
6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
126
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation of the G1000 includes equipment failures of the G1000 components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the pilot of a stuck microphone.
EIS
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-53 Stuck Microphone Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
Figure 4-54 COM Tuning Failure
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker.
REVERSIONARY MODE
APPENDICES
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview Section for
more information on Reversionary Mode.
INDEX
Figure 4-55 Display Backup Button
190-01061-02 Rev B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
127
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Blank Page
128
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The G1000 is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the G1000.
EIS
The most prominent part of the G1000 are the two full color displays: a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a
Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of flight
management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the flight management data on the PFD and MFD follows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV,
or LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Check the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Selecting the INSET Softkey again, then selecting the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.
AFCS
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by selecting the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
APPENDICES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Status Box
Map Orientation
Navigation Page Title
Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active Flight Plan Leg
Map Range
APPENDICES
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
INDEX
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
PFD Navigation Status Box
130
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next
waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD
within 1 minute’)
• Bearing (BRG)
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Symbol
Description
Active Leg
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the
MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of
the following items:
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD ->
KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn
right to 021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Endurance (END)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
EIS
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
Direct-to
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
Left Procedure Turn
Right Holding Pattern
• Fuel on Board (FOB)
• Fuel over Destination (FOD)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
Vector to Final
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
• Track (TRK)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Left DME Arc
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Left Holding Pattern
Right DME Arc
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Right Procedure Turn
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
AFCS
MFD Navigation Status Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data.
6) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the G1000 to provide situational awareness in flight. Most G1000 maps
can display the following information:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data • Aircraft icon (representing present position)
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with • Nav range ring
names
• Fuel range ring
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing to
pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent • Flight plan legs
information)
• User waypoints
• Map range
• Track vector
• Wind direction and speed
• Topography scale
• Map orientation
• Topography data
• Icons for enabled map features
• Obstacle data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Map Group Pages (MAP)
• Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
• Direct-to Window
• AUX - Trip Planning
• PFD Inset Map
• All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
• Procedure Loading Pages
MAP ORIENTATION
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
Figure 5-3 Map Orientation
INDEX
• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Desired track up (DTK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
132
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show
navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Setup
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
2) Select the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or select the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Select the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP RANGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the G1000 to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range Overzoom
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-6 Map Range
AUTO ZOOM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Auto zoom allows the G1000 to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window).
AFCS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, any map page displaying TAWS/TERRAIN data automatically adjusts
to the smallest map range clearly showing the highest priority alert. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any
map page capable of displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly
showing the traffic advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom
range based on the active waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFDs and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determines the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
APPENDICES
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
INDEX
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
134
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
Manual Range Override
Expiration Time
EIS
Auto Zoom:
Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘TIME OUT’ (zero to 99 minutes).
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer Information
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
INDEX
APPENDICES
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
136
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about Point
of Interest
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Pointer on
POI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
EIS
Information about
Airspace
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Pointer on
Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
138
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
EIS
NAVAID
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GO BACK Softkey
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
EIS
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airspace
Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace
140
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
Measurement
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
Pointer Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Measurement Line
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TOPOGRAPHY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures. Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable profile map at the bottom of the navigation
map.
Displaying/removing Profile View
1) From the Navigation Map Page, press the MAP Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Black Background
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
TOPO Softkey
Enabled
TOPO Off
TOPO On
AFCS
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).
2) Press the TOPO Softkey.
APPENDICES
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
INDEX
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
142
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TOPO DATA
On/Off
TOPO DATA
Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
AFCS
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
APPENDICES
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
Aircraft Altitude (MSL)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range of
Displayed
Elevations
Ground Elevation at Map Pointer
Location (only visible when Map
Pointer is displayed)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and select the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
TOPO SCALE
On/Off
INDEX
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
144
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP SYMBOLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
EIS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg))
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
Off
2000
Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
International Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)
30
80
State Highway (LOCAL HWY)
15
30
8
15
Railroads (RAILROAD)
15
30
LARGE CITY (> 200,000)
800
1500
MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)
100
200
SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)
20
800
50
1500
Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)
200
500
USER WAYPOINT
150
300
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
N/A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Highways and Roads
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg))
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
2000
2000
Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
2000
2000
2000
250
150
50
3
Off
15
2000
500
300
100
20
100
30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)
15
30
VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)
150
300
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
200
500
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
200
500
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
150
300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
200
500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
200
500
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
200
500
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
500
2000
Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)
Large Airports (LARGE APT)
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT)
Small Airports (SMALL APT)
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)
APPENDICES
Symbol
See Airports, NAVAIDs
See Additional Features
N/A
INDEX
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
146
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYMBOL SETUP
All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.
EIS
3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LAND DATA
On/Off
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND DATA Setup
AFCS
The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
6) Select the desired text size.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.
INDEX
8) Select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
147
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Maximum Display Range
EIS
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup
Maximum Display Range
AFCS
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
INDEX
APPENDICES
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
148
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP DECLUTTER
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Declutter Level
EIS
DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Decluttering the map:
Select the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
3) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Select the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Table 5-3 lists the items displayed at each declutter level. The ‘X’ represents map items displayed for the
various levels of declutter.
Item
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan Route Lines
Flight Plan Route Waypoints
Rivers/Lakes
Topography Data
International Borders
Track Vector
Navigation Range Ring
Fuel Range Ring
Terrain Data
Traffic
Airways
NEXRAD
XM Lightning Data
Airports
Runway Labels
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
TFRs
Obstacles
Land/Country Text
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
River/Lake Names
No Declutter Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
INDEX
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Displayed by Declutter Level
150
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways (or
Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine, propeller-driven airplanes on shorter routes and at lower
altitudes. Airways are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up
to 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” before the airway number
(hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily between VORs.
EIS
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and turbocharged piston
aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
APPENDICES
Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAYS Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AIRWY ON).
3) Select the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AIRWY LO).
EIS
4) Select the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AIRWY HI).
5) Select the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AIRWAYS).
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Airway Display Selection
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only
Low Altitude Airway Range
High Altitude Airway Range
AFCS
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
152
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Airway Type
Symbol
Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY)
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)
300
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
500
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
EIS
TRACK VECTOR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid light blue line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable
(30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Track Vector
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
APPENDICES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
153
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Wind Vector On/Off
EIS
Nav Range Ring On/Off
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SVS Field of View On/Off
Selected Altitude Arc On/Off
Fuel Range Ring
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu - WIND VECTOR On/Off, NAV RANGE RING On/Off, FIELD OF VIEW On/Off,
SEL ALT ARC On/Off, TRACK VECTOR Setup, FUEL RNG (RSV) Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WIND VECTOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
AFCS
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
Information pages.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
APPENDICES
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
154
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAV RANGE RING
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Range (radius)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nav Range Ring
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to
Window map.
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX
- System Setup Page.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.
Total Endurance Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Time to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Range to Reserve Fuel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
AFCS
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
APPENDICES
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
156
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIELD OF VIEW (SVS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision System (SVS) lateral field of view. The field
of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is only
available if SVS is installed on the aircraft.
EIS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a light blue arc when the aircraft is actuallly climbing or descending.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range to
Altitude Arc
Figure 5-30 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘SEL ALT ARC’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
158
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.3 WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Identifier Entry Field
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the G1000. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the G1000’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the
database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to
navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint
pages.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
AFCS
Waypoint Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-31 Waypoint Information Window
APPENDICES
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Identifier with
Duplicates
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Duplicate
Waypoints
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Duplicate Message
AIRPORTS
Figure 5-32 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
AFCS
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the
Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO softkey until INFO-1 is displayed.
160
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airport Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
EIS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
Airport/Runway
Diagram
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Figure 5-33 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Directory
Information
Airport Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Figure 5-34 Airport Directory Page Example
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The AOPA directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the INFO softkey until
INFO-2 is displayed. The following are types of AOPA airport directory information shown (if available) on
the Airport Directory Page:
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
AFCS
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport
• Instrument
Approaches:
Published
Approach,
Frequency
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Notes: Airport Notes
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
162
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
Viewing a destination airport:
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
APPENDICES
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
The G1000 provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a list of
up to the 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Bearing/Distance to Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
NRST Softkey
Figure 5-35 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the
ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued
presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list.
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
AFCS
Airport Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Lat/Long
APPENDICES
Figure 5-36 Airport Information Window on PFD
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’.
INDEX
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to five frequencies,
and up to five approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
164
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
- Facility/City/Elevation
EIS
Runway Information
Nearest Airport
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window Selection
Softkeys
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Figure 5-37 Nearest Airport Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the NRST Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
APPENDICES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
INDEX
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
EIS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT, WATER).
5) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Nearest Airport Criteria
INDEX
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
Figure 5-38 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
166
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
EIS
Intersection Identifier
Intersection Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
Selected Intersection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-39 Intersection Information Page
AFCS
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to eleven intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Intersection Information
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
Intersection Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reference VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Nearest
Intersection
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-40 Nearest Intersections Page
168
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NDBS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT’.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
EIS
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-41 NDB Information Page
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
AFCS
Selecting an NDB:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
NDB Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
Nearest NDB
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NDB Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-42 Nearest NDB Page
170
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VORS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information
cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is listed
as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME, it i s displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.
EIS
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
Selected VOR
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-43 VOR Information Page
AFCS
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL.
Selecting a VOR:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to eleven VORs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
VOR Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
VOR Information
AFCS
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest VOR
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-44 Nearest VOR Page
172
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
USER WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from
an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has
been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power
down.
EIS
User Waypoint Info
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
User Wpt Comment
Reference Wpt/Info
Selected User
Waypoint
User Waypoint List
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier
- Comment
# User Wpts Used
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GO BACK displayed if
User Wpt was created
on map page
Softkeys
Figure 5-45 User Waypoint Information Page
AFCS
Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the Nearest User Waypoints Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest User Wpt List
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
EIS
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected User
Waypoint
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-46 Nearest User Waypoint Page
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
1) Select the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
AFCS
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
APPENDICES
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
INDEX
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
174
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-47 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
APPENDICES
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List, if required, and press the ENT Key.
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Renaming user waypoints:
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Press the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
APPENDICES
2) Enter a new name.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
176
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
EIS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
178
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Class D Airspace
EIS
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
Restricted Area
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alert Area
Class C Airspace
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADIZ
Warning Area
APPENDICES
Figure 5-48 Airspaces
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
EIS
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Airspace Alerts Box
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
INDEX
DFLTS Softkey
Figure 5-49 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts
180
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu. See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace
area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, ‘VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
EIS
Airspace Alerts Info
Airspace 1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Airspace 2
Associated Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Softkeys
Figure 5-50 Nearest Airspaces Page
AFCS
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.
2) Press the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
APPENDICES
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Pressing the PFD ALERTS Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near –
less than 2 nm.
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
182
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the G1000 establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Direct-to Point Info
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
Map of Selected Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
AFCS
Desired Course
Figure 5-51 Direct-to Window - MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Direct-to Point Info
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
APPENDICES
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
INDEX
Activation Command
Figure 5-52 Direct-to Window - PFD
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)
Figure 5-53 Waypoint Submenu
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
2) Select the desired waypoint.
INDEX
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
184
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints (the FPL list is populated only
when navigating a flight plan, and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
AFCS
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page and press the
FMS Knob.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
EIS
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the G1000 resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
Page Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Cancel Direct-To
Navigation
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-54 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
186
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When navigating a direct-to, the G1000 sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Page Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-55 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
188
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Flight Plan Leg Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the G1000 consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The G1000 allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Symbol
EIS
Active non-heading Leg
Active heading Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment
Heading Leg ot in the current flight segment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-heading Leg not in the active flight segment
Turn Anticipation Arc
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
AFCS
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
EIS
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active FPL Waypoint List
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Vertical Navigation Profile
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Deviation
AFCS
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-56 Active Flight Plan Page
190
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Comment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
EIS
Figure 5-57 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Catalog Contents
- # Used
- # Empty
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan List
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
AFCS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Softkeys
Figure 5-58 Flight Plan Catalog Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the G1000 is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
APPENDICES
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
3) Select the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.
192
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
EIS
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
APPENDICES
Import/Export Softkeys
Import Successful
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
Figure 5-59 Flight Plan Import
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
Import/Export Softkeys
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
Export Successful
INDEX
Figure 5-60 Flight Plan Export
194
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans
are limited to 99 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints
in the flight plan exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
EIS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Softkeys
Figure 5-61 Stored Flight Plan Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Plan Full Message
APPENDICES
Figure 5-62 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
INDEX
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
EIS
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
Figure 5-63 Duplicate Waypoints Window
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
INDEX
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
196
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
EIS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The G1000 also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preview of
Selected Airway
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-64 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and select the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
Airway Entry Waypoint
EIS
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airway Exit Points
Available
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-65 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
Inserted Airway Header
INDEX
APPENDICES
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
Figure 5-66 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
198
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
EIS
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the G1000 database.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The G1000 allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Plan Name
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkeys
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan -
APPENDICES
Figure 5-67 Stored Flight Plan Page
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURE (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
EIS
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMCI
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected
Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-68 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Select the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
200
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected
Departure End
Point
Selected Transition
EIS
Departure Transition Points
Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-69 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inserted Departure Header
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-70 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL (STAR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Arrival
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-71 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Select the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
202
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY1
EIS
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-72 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inserted Arrival Header
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-73 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACH (APPR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
EIS
Destination Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Approach
Approaches Available at
KCOS
Barometric Minimum
Preview of
Selected
Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-74 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Select the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select an approach. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
204
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Barometric Minimum
EIS
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Load Approach?
Figure 5-75 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Approach Header
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV 35RGPS LPV)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-76 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the G1000 is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Flight Plan
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
Stored Flight Plan Info
AFCS
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-77 Stored Flight Plan Information
APPENDICES
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
206
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SORT FLIGHT PLANS
The stored flight plans can be sorted alphanumerically based on the flight plan name (comment) assigned
to each flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Sorting by flight plan name (comment):
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Sort By Comment’ and press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
EIS
4 ) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to change flight plan ordering. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, select the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
APPENDICES
The G1000 allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
INDEX
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Select the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Copy to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the G1000 memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
The G1000 allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
G1000.
APPENDICES
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
INDEX
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
208
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
EIS
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
EIS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
APPENDICES
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
210
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
EIS
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
entered from 1 to 99 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
Figure 5-78 Along Track Offset
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 99 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
INDEX
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude for the offset.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
212
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PARALLEL TRACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track
Selecting Parallel
Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-79 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
Activating parallel track:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activation Prompt
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-80 Parallel Track Window
Parallel Track Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- SLN-p
- HYS-p
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the entire active
flight segment (e.g.,
enroute)
AFCS
Parallel Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Original Track
APPENDICES
Figure 5-81 Parallel Track Active
INDEX
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
214
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Subdued Prompt
(Unavailable)
EIS
Unavailable Status
Invalid
Geometry
Approach
Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-82 Parallel Track Unavailable
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
Cancel Prompt
AFCS
Active Status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-83 Cancelling Parallel Track
APPENDICES
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a flight plan leg:
The G1000 allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
EIS
3) Select the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Current
Active Leg
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Destination
Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activate Leg Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-84 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
216
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Confirmation Window
Figure 5-85 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).2)
Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
EIS
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-86 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
APPENDICES
Switching between wide and narrow view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.
INDEX
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
218
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
Active Flight Plan Wide View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-87 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000 allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
AFCS
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Q3.FEPOT Airway
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Collapsed View
Expanded View
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-88 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The G1000 displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
220
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The G1000 supports vertical navigation for all lateral leg types except for CA, CI, FA, FM, HA, HM, PI,
VA, VD, VI, VR, and VM. Vertical constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
EIS
The G1000 system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute
and teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ENBL VNV Softkey
CNCL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-89 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Press the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The G1000 allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Selecting the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
After VNV Direct-to
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Prior to VNV Direct-to
VNV Direct-To Softkey
VNV PROF Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-90 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (light blue number) to be used. If
INDEX
not, the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
222
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
2) Press the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The G1000 system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displayed Text
Examples
Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Large White Text
AFCS
Large Light Blue Text
Cross AT
2,300 ft
Small Light Blue Text
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
Small Light Blue
Subdued Text
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
APPENDICES
Figure 5-91 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
White Text
Light Blue Text
Light Blue Subdued Text
Large Altitude calculated by the system
Text estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Small
Text
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.
Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes associated with approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system automatically
uses the altitudes loaded with the approach for giving vertical speed and deviation guidance. Note that these
altitudes are displayed as blue text up to, but not including, the FAF. The FAF is always a “reference only”
altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance. In this case,
the FAF altitude can be designated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
INDEX
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the G1000 allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
224
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
EIS
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the G1000 displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The G1000 also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
226
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.
EIS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DEPARTURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Available Procedure Actions
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Departure Airport
Loaded Procedures
Departure Preview
Departure Choices
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-92 Departure Selection
Loaded Departure
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Departure
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
INDEX
Figure 5-93 Departure Loading
228
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available departures at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Select the INFO-x Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Available Procedure Actions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Destination Airport
APPENDICES
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
INDEX
Figure 5-94 Arrival Selection
230
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Arrival
Loaded Arrival
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-95 Arrival Loading
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
7) Select the INFO-x Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPROACHES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Check the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved.
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
APPENDICES
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the
procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
INDEX
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
232
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
Example on HSI
EIS
Approach Type
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
GPS approach using published LNAV minima.
Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV
minima
LPV
GPS approach using published LPV minima
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, and LPV approaches according to the published
chart. LNAV+V is a standard LNAV approach with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the G1000 PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where
LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach type
is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
- LNAV
- LNAV+V
- L/VNAV
- LPV
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 5-9 Approach Types
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
3) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
4) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
6) Barometric Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
b) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Available Procedure Actions
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Airport
Loaded Procedures
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-96 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Approach
APPENDICES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 5-97 Approach Loading
234
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the APR Softkey. The Approach
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Minimums box. The approach is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO minimums on or off. Press the ENT Key.
a) When minimums are selected on, the cursor moves to the minimum altitude field . Use the small FMS Knob to
select the altitude. Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on
the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
b) When minimums are selected off, the cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the INFO-x Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
AFCS
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Barometric Minimums
APPENDICES
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
Or:
b) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
EIS
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
236
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the Go Around Button.
Or:
Fly past the MAP, and press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD.
Or:
1) Press the PROC Key.
EIS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COURSE TO ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for
this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is
reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Course to Altitude Leg
INDEX
Figure 5-98 Course to Altitude
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Trip Statistics
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
AFCS
Fuel Statistics
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-99 Trip Planning Page
APPENDICES
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.
INDEX
• Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
238
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
APPENDICES
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EIS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by taking the time
of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).
AFCS
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Selected Leg(s)
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
APPENDICES
Figure 5-100 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
INDEX
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-101 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
240
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
Select the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Select the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
AFCS
1) Select the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.10 RAIM PREDICTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over SBAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
RAIM PREDICTION Box
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-102 RAIM Prediction
242
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
EIS
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
AFCS
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-103 SBAS Display - Active
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
244
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
Figure 5-104 SBAS Display - Disabled
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the SBAS capable GPS system while the
G1000 provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: Check the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
EIS
should be considered not current.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-105 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
2) Figure 5-105 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-105 Assigned Heading of 240º
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-106.
Figure 5-106 Assigned Heading of 290º
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
246
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight
plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-107. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is placed
immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-107 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for V4,
Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-108.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-108 Entering V4 Entry Point
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-109.
Figure 5-109 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-108, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
f) Select the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-110.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-110 List of Available Airways for TOP
INDEX
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-110.
248
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-111.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-111 List of Available Exits for V4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
i) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-111.
j) Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-112.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-112 Ready to Load V4
APPENDICES
k) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
l) V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-113.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-113 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight SLN. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the leg.
AFCS
c) Select the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-114. Note the TOP to
SLN leg is actually part of V4.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-114 Comfirm Active Leg
250
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-115, the magenta arrow in
the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note the
phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active. Since a
leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed
to 2.0 nm.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-115 V4 Now Active Leg
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-116.
Figure 5-116 Turn on to Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-117.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-117 Turn to Intercept V244
252
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) As seen in Figure 5-118, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-118 V244 Now Active Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-119.
Figure 5-119 HYS to LAA Leg Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-120.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
c) Press the Direct-to (
Figure 5-120 Direct To OPSHN
254
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-121.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-121 Enter VNV Altitude
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-122.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-122 Enter VNV Offset Distance
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three miles
prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the G1000 gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an
altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-123, the magenta arrow indicating the
direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset
distance and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure
have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a
track along the magenta line to OPSHN.
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the CDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
to be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired altitude,
then pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as light blue meaning it is used by the system to
determine vertical speed and deviation guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-123 Direct-to Active
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
256
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-124.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-124 Procedures Window
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-125.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-125 List of Available Approaches
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-125.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-126.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK is
used.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-126 List of Available Transitions
To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
g) Press the ENT Key.
h) Barometric Minimums
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
258
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-127 Barometric Minimums Set
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
i) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen
in Figure 5-128.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-128 Loaded Approach
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-129. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as light blue text, indicating these values are
“designated” for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the CLR Key.
EIS
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-129.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the WAAS GPS
altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-129 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
260
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Select the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-130.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS Knob
to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
EIS
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of
10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-130 Adjusting the Descent
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
15) As seen in Figure 5-131, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-132. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-132, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-131 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
AFCS
Target Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
APPENDICES
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
INDEX
Figure 5-132 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
262
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-133.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
Figure 5-133 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-134.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-134 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-135. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-135 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
264
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-136. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-136 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-137). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
A descent to HABUK is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
265
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INDEX
Figure 5-137 Approaching PYNON
266
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-138).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-138 Approach is Now Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note: To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-139.
AFCS
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-139 Manually Activate Approach
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-140 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
268
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly and is
used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to
the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-141) when the final approach course becomes active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-141 Descending to the FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-141.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-142.
Figure 5-142 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is not part
of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along the runway
centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude
is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In
this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to
is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is reached. After reaching
6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is
above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix (MOGAL) to
begin the missed approach procedure.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure. For
example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold
Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the aircraft
altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the
missed approach procedure is activated.
270
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the Go Around Button, or press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD, to resume
automatic waypoint sequencing through the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-143.
The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the HSI.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-143 Missed Approach Active
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern is established at
the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-144.
Figure 5-144 Establishing the Holding Pattern
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-145.
INDEX
Figure 5-145 Hold Established
272
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the G1000
stops using GPS.
EIS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the G1000 detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the G1000
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the G1000 in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the G1000 through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compounds the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DR Mode is indicated on the G1000 by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in yellow over the ‘own
aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-146. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI slightly
above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-146. Also, the CDI deviation bar
is removed from the display. Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the PFD.
Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.
AFCS
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-146.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Also, while the G1000 is in DR Mode, the autopilot does not couple to GPS, and both TAWS and Terrain
Proximity are disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints)
is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance &
Bearing
Current
Track
Indicator)
EIS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion
Wind Data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Wind Data
Nav Data Bar
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All data except
Active Leg,
TAS, and DTK
are in yellow
AFCS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
APPENDICES
Figure 5-146 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
INDEX
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
274
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the G1000 are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Weather and Temporary Flight Restrictions (Optional)
• L-3 Stormscope® WX-500 Series II Weather Mapping Sensor (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance
EIS
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVS (Included with SVS option)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B) (Optional)
Traffic
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
• Avidyne TAS600® Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Garmin GDL 90 Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic (Optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SIRIUSXM WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SiriusXM Weather is a service provided through the GDL 69/69A, a remote-mounted datalink satellite receiver.
Received graphical weather information and associated text is displayed on the Multi Function Display (MFD) and
the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map. The GDL 69A can also receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
services. Both weather data and entertainment programming operate in the S-band frequency range to provide
continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Both services from SiriusXM are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SERVICES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Before SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio can be used, the services must be activated. Service
is activated by providing coded IDs unique to the installed GDL 69/69A. SiriusXM Satellite Radio (audio) and
SiriusXM Weather (data) services each have coded IDs. The Data and Audio Radio IDs must be provided to
activate the weather service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are located on:
• The XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
AFCS
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• The SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to display weather data and/
or entertainment programming provided through the GDL 69/69A.
Activating SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
APPENDICES
1) Contact SiriusXM by the customer service phone number listed on their website. Follow the instructions provided
by SiriusXM customer service.
2) Select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
4) Verify that the desired services are activated.
INDEX
5) Press the LOCK Softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
7) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
276
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Satellite Radio)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data Radio ID
(for XM WX
Satellite
Weather)
Select to Lock
Subscription
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select to Display XM
Information page
EIS
Weather
Products
(Available
Products for
Service Class
Indicated in
Green)
USING SIRIUSXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The principal map for viewing SiriusXM Weather data is the Map - XM Weather Data Link Page. This is the
only map display capable of showing information for all available SiriusXM Weather products.
Viewing the XM Weather Data Link Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
AFCS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Symbol
and Ages (U.S.
and Canada)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-01061-02 Rev. B
INDEX
NEXRAD
Weather
Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-2 XM Weather Data Link Page
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For each enabled SiriusXM Weather product, the system displays a weather product icon and product age.
The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since the weather data provider compiled the weather product.
The product age display does not indicate the age of the information contained within the weather product,
which can be significantly older than the displayed weather product age.
EIS
The SiriusXM Weather service broadcasts weather products at specific intervals (defined in the Broadcast
Rate column in Table 6-1). If for any reason, a product is not refreshed within the Broadcast Rate intervals
(see Table 6-1), the system removes the expired data from the display, and shows dashes instead of the product
age. This ensures the displayed information is consistent with what is currently being transmitted by the
SiriusXM Weather service. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
changes to yellow. If data for a weather product is not available, the system displays ‘N/A’ next to the weather
product symbol instead of the product age.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not
contain updated weather products. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated
or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. SiriusXM and its weather data suppliers define and control
the data update intervals, which are subject to change.
278
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Symbol
Echo Top
(ECHO TOP)
12
60
12
90
12
90
12
60
12
120
12
90
12
60
5
60
12
90
22
90
12
90
12
180
12
30
5
60
12
60
12
INDEX
30
APPENDICES
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
30
AFCS
7.5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
30
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
60
EIS
XM Lightning
(LTNG)
Cell Movement
(CELL MOV)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
City Forecast
(CITY)
Surface Analysis
(SFC)
Freezing Levels
(FRZ LVL)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
County Warnings
(COUNTY)
Cyclone Warnings
(CYCLONE)
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Air Report
(AIREPs)
Turbulence
(TURB)
Radar Coverage
no product image
(RADAR CVRG)
Temporary Flight Restrictions
no product image
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
no product image
(TAFs)
Expiration Time Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
(Minutes)
5 (U.S.)
30
10 (Canada)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SiriusXM Weather Product
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
279
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
+
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
Flight Plan Pages
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METARs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft (WIND)
AFCS
+
XM Lightning (LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Video Page
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
XM Weather Data Link
Page
NEXRAD
Navigation Map Page
EIS
SiriusXM Weather Product
PFD Inset Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 6-2 shows which SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.
+
+
+
+
City Forecast (CITY)
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
+*
+
+
County Warnings (COUNTY)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
TAFs
INDEX
APPENDICES
* Winds Aloft data is available inside Profile View when enabled on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-2 SiriusXM Weather Product Display Maps
280
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure 6-3
shows the weather product softkeys for the XM Weather Data Link Page). When a weather product is selected
for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled.
CYCLONE SFC OFF
FRZ LVL
SIG/AIR
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
WIND OFF ICNG OFF TURB OFF AIREPS
PIREPS
COUNTY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD ECHO TOP CLD TOP XM LTNG CELL MOV
ENGINE
BACK
SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
CURRENT
12 HR
24 HR
36 HR
48 HR
LEGEND
BACK
EIS
OFF
Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
1000
3000
6000
9000
12000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
42000
45000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
15000
36000
AFCS
SFC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OFF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-3 XM Weather Data Link Page Softkeys
APPENDICES
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the XM Weather Data Link Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing the XM Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-4).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’ or ‘PRODUCT GROUP 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure
6-5).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the XM Weather Data Link Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-4 XM Weather Data Link Page Menu
Figure 6-5 XM Weather Data Link Page Setup Menu
Restoring default XM Weather Data Link Page settings:
APPENDICES
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
282
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Maps besides the XM Weather Data Link Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-6).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-8).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-6 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
APPENDICES
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the XM Weather Data Link
Page. A weather product legend can also be displayed on the Navigation Map Page for active SiriusXM Weather
products displayed on that page.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the XM Weather Data Link Page):
INDEX
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Navigation Map Page):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the LEGEND Softkey (available if one or more XM weather products are enabled for display).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
• Echo Tops
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• SIGMETs
• PIREPs
• AIRMETs
• AIREPs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning
the RANGE Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map
Pointer.
• METARs
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Additional
Information
about Item
Selected with
Map Pointer
Available
INDEX
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
Figure 6-9 Panning on the XM Weather Data Link Page
284
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD
NOTE: NEXRAD cannot be displayed at the same time as echo tops, icing, turbulence, or terrain
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of more than 150 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD
network provides centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected
overseas locations. The maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
EIS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated refresh time for the NEXRAD weather product.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be used as a basis for
maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
No Radar Coverage
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Data on the XM Weather Data Link Page
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD data can be displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• XM Weather Data Link Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• Airport Information Page
• AUX-Video Page
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
EIS
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the XM
Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is composed of
the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded
to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the XM Weather Data
Link Page. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-11), press the LEGEND Softkey when NEXRAD is selected for
display.
No Radar Coverage
AFCS
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data with Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas where
NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected are
indicated in gray shade of purple.
Reflectivity
APPENDICES
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
INDEX
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
286
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
EIS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-12).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Block Area is 4 km2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Data - Zoomed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
APPENDICES
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is shown as mixed precipitation regardless of actual
precipitation type.
EIS
No Coverage
Above 55ºN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precipitation
Above 52ºN
Displays as Mixed
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Data - Canada
288
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ECHO TOPS
NOTE: Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops or NEXRAD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Echo Tops data (Figure 6-14) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-14 Echo Tops Data
Displaying Echo Tops information:
AFCS
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the ECHO TOP Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-15), press the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
APPENDICES
No Radar Coverage
INDEX
Figure 6-15 Echo Tops Legend
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas where
NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected are
indicated in a gray shade of purple.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Cloud Tops data (Figure 6-16) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
AFCS
Figure 6-16 Cloud Tops Data
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the CLD TOP Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-17), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected for
display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Legend
290
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
XM LIGHTNING
NOTE: XM Lightning and optional L-3 Stormscope® WX-500 Lightning data cannot be displayed at the same
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
time.
XM Lightning data (Figure 6-18) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A
strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location of the
lightning strike is not displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Lightning
Strikes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-18 Lightning Data
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• XM Weather Data Link Page
• Flight Plan Pages
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• PFD Inset Map
AFCS
XM Lightning data displays on the following maps:
Displaying XM Lightning information:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the XM
Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the XM LTNG Softkey (LTNG Softkey on the XM Weather Data Link Page).
To display the XM Lightning legend on the XM Weather Data Link Page (Figure 6-19), press the LEGEND
Softkey when XM Lightning is selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-19 Lightning Legend
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CELL MOVEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cell Movement data (Figure 6-20) shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Storm Cells
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-20 Cell Movement Data
AFCS
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement data is selected for display along with NEXRAD. On the XM
Weather Data Link Page, Cell Movement data can be selected independently. Cell Movement data can be
displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• AUX - Video Page
• Navigation Map
• Nearest Pages
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
Displaying Cell Movement information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the XM
Weather Data Link Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the XM Weather Data Link Page). For Cell Movement to
be displayed on maps other than the XM Weather Data Link Page, Cell Movement must be turned on in the
Navigation Map Setup Menu (see the procedure “Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation
Map Page”).
INDEX
To display the Cell Movement legend on the XM Weather Data Link Page, (Figure 6-21), press the LEGEND
Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend
292
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms.
Airmet
Turbulence
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIRMET
IFR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-22 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
AFCS
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the RANGE Knob and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-23 shows sample SIGMET text.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-24), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
APPENDICES
190-01061-02 Rev. B
INDEX
Figure 6-23 Sample SIGMET Text
Figure 6-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-25 METAR Flags on the XM Weather Data Link Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
APPENDICES
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, then as raw text. TAF information is displayed only in its raw form when it is available.
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the XM Weather Data Link Page, press the METAR Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
294
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the XM Weather Data Link Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
EIS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METAR data for the
Selected Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR Symbol
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-26 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
Raw METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page on
which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
APPENDICES
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MF.D.
A METAR flag is shown next to waypoint(s) in the flight plan with an available METAR.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying raw METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘SELECTED
WAYPOINT WEATHER’ window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
EIS
To display the METAR legend on the XM Weather Data Link Page (Figure 6-27), press the LEGEND Softkey
when METARs are selected for display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-27 METAR Legend
296
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed navigation database
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
service area.
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information (Figure 6-28) is available for current and forecast weather
conditions. Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-28 Current Surface Analysis Data
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
AFCS
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect the forecast time selected.
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-29), press the LEGEND Softkey when
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are selected to be displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-29 City Forecast and Surface Analysis Legend
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FREEZING LEVELS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Freezing Level data (Figure 6-30) shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at
which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude
has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next
update.
Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
AFCS
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-31), press the LEGEND Softkey when Freezing Level data is
selected to be displayed.
INDEX
Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Legend
298
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WINDS ALOFT
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-32) shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments up to 42,000 feet MSL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND Softkey.
EIS
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Data at 9,000 Feet
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-33), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-34). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Profile View
Path Enabled
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-34 Winds Aloft Data Inside Profile View (Navigation Map Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-3.
Headwind
Symbol
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
5 knots
AFCS
10 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
50 knots
Table 6-3 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
Showing/Hiding Profile View (containing winds aloft data)
APPENDICES
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
300
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Winds Aloft data inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-35).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-36).
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’ (Figure 6-37).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-35 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-36 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-37 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
COUNTY WARNINGS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
County data (Figure 6-38) provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings from the
National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on tornadoes, severe thunderstorms, and
flood conditions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Flood
Warning
Figure 6-38 County Flood Warning
AFCS
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the COUNTY Softkey.
APPENDICES
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-39), press the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings
are displayed.
INDEX
Figure 6-39 County Warnings Legend
302
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CYCLONE
The Cyclone weather product (Figure 6-40) shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical
storms, and their projected tracks.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cyclone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-40 Cyclone Data with Projected Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the CYCLONE Softkey.
AFCS
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-41), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cyclone data is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-41 Cyclone Legend
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ICING (CIP & SLD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Current Icing Product (CIP) data shows a graphical view of the current icing environment (Figure 6-42).
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the
analysis.
NOTE: Icing data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data.
EIS
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying Icing data:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through
the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Icing
Potential
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
SLD Threat
APPENDICES
Figure 6-42 Icing Data at 6,000 Feet
INDEX
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-43), press the LEGEND Softkey when Icing data is displayed.
Figure 6-43 Icing Potential Legend
304
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURBULENCE
NOTE: Turbulence data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turbulence data (Figure 6-44) identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
EIS
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Severe
Turbulence
Moderate
Turbulence
Light
Turbulence
AFCS
Figure 6-44 Turbulence Data at 21,000 Feet
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-45), press the LEGEND Softkey when Turbulence is selected for
display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-45 Turbulence Legend
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PIREPS AND AIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. When significant weather
conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP
may contain unforecast adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind
shear, turbulence, and type of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). AIREPs are used almost exclusively by commercial airlines.
EIS
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
and AIREP Text
AIREP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Routine
PIREP
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Urgent
PIREP
Figure 6-46 AIREPs and PIREPs on the XM Weather Data Link Page
AFCS
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
4) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather
report when it is selected.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, then as raw text. Note the raw text may contain additional information not found in the
decoded report.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the XM Weather Data Link Page.
306
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Age of report in HH:MM
Decoded PIREP Text
Selected PIREP
Raw PIREP Text
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-47 PIREP Text on the Weather Information Page
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-48), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs
are displayed.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-48 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TFRS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Federal Aviation Administration issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas where
flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security, law
enforcement, natural disasters., airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any time, and
TFR data displayed on the G1000 is only intended to supplement official TFR information obtained from
official sources including Flight Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TFR Summary
Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
AFCS
Figure 6-49 TFR Data on the XM Weather Data Link Page
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the XM Weather Data Link Page or Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
APPENDICES
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
Figure 6-50 Full Text for Selected TFR
308
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the TFR
product data is removed from the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-51).
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-52).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-53).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-51 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-52 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-53 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Aviation Group
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 WX-500 STORMSCOPE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Stormscope lightning information cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as lightning
EIS
information from data link lightning sources.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following pages can display Stormscope data:
• Stormscope Page
• Navigation Map
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• AUX - Video Page
• Nearest Pages
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Map - Stormscope Page is the principal page for viewing Stormscope data. Stormscope data can be displayed
on other map pages as an additional reference. To display Stormscope data on the Navigation Map, AUX - Trip
Planning Page, or any of the Nearest Pages, press the MAP Softkey, then press the STRMSCP Softkey. These pages
can also display cell or strike data using the yellow lightning strike symbology shown in Table 6-4.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-4 Lightning Age and Symbols
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
APPENDICES
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-54), press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’,
and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections (Figure 6-55).
INDEX
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-56).
310
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following options are available (Figure 6-55):
• STRMSCP LTNG – Turns the display of Stormscope data on or off.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
• STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays. Stormscope data is removed
when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-54 Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-55 Map Setup Menu
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-56). Stormscope identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options. When an item is selected, press the
ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 6-56 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
APPENDICES
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’ (Figure 6-57).
3) Press the ENT Key.
312
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-57 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ZOOM RANGE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North up mode) on the Navigation
Map Page. However, in the track up mode at the 500 nm range, a portion of Stormscope lightning data
can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North up mode
shows all the data.
At a map range of less than 25 nm, Stormscope lightning data is not displayed, but can still be present. The
presence of Stormscope lightning data is indicated by the annunciation ‘LTNG < 25 nm’ in the upper right
corner (Figure 6-58).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-58 Lightning Display Range Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘MAP SETUP’.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum display range.
7) Press the ENT Key.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out or
counter-clockwise to zoom in.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SELECTING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page (Figure 6-59).
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) To change the map range, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
Figure 6-59 Stormscope Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE softkeys are displayed.
APPENDICES
3) Press the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚ on the Stormscope Page:
INDEX
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC softkeys are displayed. Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚
viewing area or press the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
3) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
314
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.3 TERRAIN PROXIMITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
EIS
G1000 Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO-C151b certification
standards. It increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not
confuse Terrain Proximity with a Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated
and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning annunciations or voice
alerts. It only provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are within a certain altitude
threshold from the aircraft. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more
sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
AFCS
The G1000 GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
position. GPS altitude is then converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is used
to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not
subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GPS-MSL altitude
does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity
feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation
to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
The Map - Terrain Proximity Page is the principal page for viewing terrain and obstacle information. The
symbols and colors in the figure and table below are used to represent obstacles and aircraft altitude when the
Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display. Terrain Proximity uses black, yellow, and red to represent terrain
information relative to aircraft altitude. The color of each obstacle is associated with the altitude of the aircraft.
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
EIS
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Figure 6-60 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-5 Terrain Proximity Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following pages:
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• AUX - Video Page
• Terrain Proximity Page
• Flight Plan Page
AFCS
• PFD Inset Map
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
When Terrain Proximity is selected on maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page, an icon to indicate the
feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown (Figure 6-64).
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
316
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized by
Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20
nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
EIS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-61).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-62).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-63).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-61 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
190-01061-02 Rev. B
INDEX
Figure 6-62 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-63 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning the RANGE
Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
EIS
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
Terrain Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-64 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
AFCS
The Terrain Proximity Page is specialized to show terrain and obstacle data in relation to the aircraft’s current
altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal page for viewing Terrain Proximity information.
Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft orientation on this map is heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain Proximity Page:
APPENDICES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page.
3) To change the view,
a) Press the VIEW Softkey.
INDEX
b) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view.
318
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived MSL
Altitude
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
EIS
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-65 Terrain Proximity Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AFCS
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived MSL
Altitude
Map Range Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
APPENDICES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
Figure 6-66 Terrain Proximity Page (ARC View)
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.4 PROFILE VIEW TERRAIN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Profile View Terrain data for primary terrain avoidance. Profile View Terrain is intended
only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The G1000 offers a Profile View of terrain and obstacles relative to the aircraft’s current flight path and altitude
on the Navigation Map Page of the MFD. Profile View does not provide terrain or obstacle caution or warning
annunciations or voice alerts, nor does it display potential impact points inside the Profile View. The colors and
symbols in Figure 6-67 and Table 6-6 are used to represent terrain and obstacles.
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Figure 6-67 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Profile View Terrain
AFCS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
APPENDICES
Table 6-6 Profile View Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Accessing Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
320
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/Disabling Profile View Terrain on the Navigation Map (when Profile View is enabled):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the TERRAIN Softkey.
EIS
PROFILE VIEW DISPLAY
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the Profile View is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown
along a vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally
along the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the RANGE Knob, the horizontal distance of the Profile
View is adjusted proportionately to be 1/2 of the Navigation Map range distance down to 1 nm, at which point
Profile View is no longer available (‘PROFILE NOT AVAILABLE’ is displayed). When Navigation Map range
is adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles
from the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the Profile View; only an outline of the terrain
will be displayed in black in the Profile View window. Refer to the Terrain Proximity, Terrain-SVS, or TAWS-B
discussions for more information about displaying terrain or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Profile View
Path Enabled
Navigation Map Range
Altitude Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain Legend
APPENDICES
Profile View Length
is One Half of the
Navigation Map
Range
Distance Scale
Figure 6-68 Profile View on Navigation Map with Terrain Display Enabled
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Profile View is based on the current aircraft track (or heading if track is unavailable) and shows the highest
known terrain or obstacles within a predetermined width from the present aircraft position to the end of the
profile range. The width of the Profile View (Table 6-7) is determined by the phase of flight, as annunciated on
the HSI. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information about flight phases.
Flight Phase
Total Profile View Width
Approach
0.6 nm
Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
Enroute
4.0 nm
Oceanic
4.0 nm
Table 6-7 Profile View Width Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PROFILE PATH
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Profile Path displays the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the Profile View. The path is shown
as a white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-68) and is only available when Profile View is
enabled. White range markers both edges of the Profile Path rectangle match the range markers along the
distance scale inside the Profile View display window whenever the profile range is at least 4 nm (or 7.5 km
if configured for metric units).
The Profile Path rectangle may be configured on or off, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile
Path is removed from map display can be changed.
Customizing the Profile Path display on the Navigation Map Page:
AFCS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-69).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Profile’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-70).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-71).
APPENDICES
• PROFILE PATH – Turns the display of the Profile Path on or off and sets maximum map range at which the Profile
Path is shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings).
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
322
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-69 Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-70 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-71 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Profile Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.5 TERRAIN-SVS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain-SVS information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain-SVS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
G1000 Terrain-SVS is a terrain awareness system available with the Synthetic Vision System (SVS). SVS
functionality is offered as an optional enhancement. Terrain-SVS is integrated within SVS to provide visual
annunciations and voice alerts to indicate the presence of threatening terrain relevant to the projected flight path.
For detailed information regarding SVS, refer to the Additional Features section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain-SVS does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It increases situational awareness and
aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) and obstacles. Do not confuse Terrain-SVS with a Terrain
Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified.
Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more sophisticated algorithms to
assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles and provides additional types of alerts.
Terrain-SVS requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
Terrain-SVS displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
AFCS
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The G1000 GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
position. GPS altitude is then converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is used
to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not
subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GPS-MSL altitude
does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude, the
Terrain-SVS feature portrays a 3-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight
path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous
terrain and obstacle conditions.
324
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISPLAYING TERRAIN-SVS DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain-SVS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in the figure and tables below are used to represent terrain,
obstacles, and potential impact points.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-72 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-8 Terrain-SVS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
AFCS
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Warning
Caution
Table 6-9 Terrain-SVS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
APPENDICES
The Map - Terrain-SVS Page is the principal page for viewing terrain and obstacle information. Terrain-SVS
information can also be displayed on the following pages and maps as an additional reference:
• PFD Inset Map
• Flight Plan Pages
• Navigation Map Page
• AUX - Video Page
INDEX
• Trip Planning Page
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
325
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When Terrain-SVS is selected on maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page, an icon to indicate the feature is
enabled for display and a legend for Terrain-SVS terrain colors are shown (Figure 6-73).
Figure 6-73 Terrain-SVS Icon and Legend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
AFCS
Maps besides the Terrain-SVS Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-74).
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-75).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-76).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
INDEX
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
326
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-74 Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-75 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-76 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN-SVS PAGE
AFCS
The Terrain-SVS Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation to
the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal map page for viewing TerrainSVS data. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle
and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential
point of impact on the Terrain-SVS Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain-SVS Page.
APPENDICES
Changing the Terrain-SVS Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
INDEX
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived MSL
Altitude
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
EIS
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-77 Terrain-SVS Page (360 View)
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived MSL
Altitude
AFCS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Annunciation
Window
INDEX
Figure 6-78 Terrain-SVS Page (ARC View)
328
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERRAIN-SVS ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVS software algorithms.
Terrain-SVS alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, visual annunciations appear with simultaneous voice alerts. Table 6-10 shows Terrain-SVS alert types
with corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TerrainSVS Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the Terrain-SVS Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PFD Alert
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MFD Pop-up Alert
AFCS
Figure 6-79 Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 6-80 Navigation Map Page
(After Terrain-SVS Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVS Page)
Voice Alert
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-10 Terrain-SVS Alerts Summary
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVS compares the aircraft’s projected
flight path with known terrain and obstacles in their respective databases and issues four types of alerts.
AFCS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-81. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
Terrain-SVS Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the Terrain-SVS Page. The alert is annunciated when
the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-81.
330
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level (FT)
Descending (FT)
800
600
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
500
400
300
200
EIS
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
700
100
0
5
10
15
20
25
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Figure 6-81 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
FLTA visual annunciations and voice alerts can also be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used when
inhibiting Terrain-SVS and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When Terrain-SVS is inhibited,
the alert annunciation ‘TER INH’ is shown on the PFD and MFD (Figure 6-82).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-82 Terrain-SVS Alerting Disabled
(Terrain-SVS Inhibited) Annunciation
AFCS
Inhibiting/enabling Terrain-SVS alerting:
1) Select the Terrain-SVS Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable Terrain-SVS (choice dependent on current state).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit Terrain-SVS’ or ‘Enable Terrain-SVS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
If Terrain-SVS alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint on a GPS SBAS
approach, a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft
altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments
Section for details.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Terrain-SVS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “Terrain System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
During power-up, Terrain-SVS conducts a system test of its alerting capabilities. The system issues a voice
alert when the test has concluded.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain-SVS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums.
Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the
annunciation ‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVS Page. The voice
alert “Terrain System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the aircraft is
within the database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.
PFD/MFD† Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
System Test in Progress
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
System Test Pass
None
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Excessively degraded GPS signal; or
Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain or
Obstacle database unavailable or
invalid; Invalid software configuration;
or System audio fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and Terrain-SVS
operating with PFD Terrain or Obstacle
databases
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
None
None
None
None
Voice Alert
None
NO GPS POSITION
No GPS position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain-SVS Page Center
Banner Annunciation
TERRAIN TEST
“Terrain System Not
Available”*
“Terrain System Not
Available”*
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
INDEX
APPENDICES
† Annunciation is shown on Terrain-SVS Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered. This voice alert is only issued when the aircraft is in the air.
Table 6-11 Terrain-SVS System Status Annunciations
332
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.6 TAWS-B
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS is intended only to enhance
situational awareness.
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B) is an optional feature to increase situational
awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-B provides visual annunciations and
voice alerts when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed
annunciations and voice alerts are advisory in nature only.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification.
TAWS-B requires the following to operate properly:
• Valid terrain, airport terrain, and obstacle databases
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based
on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be
shown if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data to confirm accuracy of the content, per TSO-C151b.
However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may still contain
inaccuracies.
AFCS
The G1000 GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
position. GPS altitude is then converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is used
to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not
subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GPS-MSL altitude
does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and GPSderived MSL altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the
position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the system uses the GPS position and MSL altitude to calculate
and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-B
can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle conditions.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the displayed MSL altitude.
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DISPLAYING TAWS-B DATA
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-83 and Tables 6-12 and 6-13 are used to represent
terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-83 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
AFCS
Table 6-12 TAWS-B Obstacle Colors and Symbology
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
Warning
APPENDICES
Caution
INDEX
Table 6-13 TAWS-B Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
334
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B information can be displayed on the following maps:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• TAWS-B Page
• AUX - Video Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• PFD Inset Map
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the TAWS-B Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Map - TAWS-B Page is the principal map page for viewing TAWS-B information. When TAWS-B is
selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, the system displays a terrain icon to indicate that the feature is
enabled for display. A legend for TAWS-B terrain colors will accompany the icon on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-84) and the Flight Plan Pages. The icon is always shown on the TAWS-B Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-84 Terrain Icon and Legend
AFCS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
APPENDICES
Maps besides the TAWS-B Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-85).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-86).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-87).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
EIS
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-85 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-87 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-86 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
336
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The TAWS-B Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation to the
aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs)
can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the system
reduces the map range if necessary to clearly show the potential impact point on the TAWS-B Page.
Aircraft orientation on the TAWS-B Page is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are
available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like Arc (120°) display.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
EIS
Displaying the TAWS-B Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-B Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the TAWS-B Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
337
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived
Altitude above
MSL
EIS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-88 TAWS-B Page (360 View)
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived
Altitude above
MSL
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AFCS
Map Range Arc
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
APPENDICES
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Annunciation
Window
INDEX
Figure 6-89 TAWS-B Page (Arc View)
338
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When the system
issues an alert, the system provides visual annunciations with simultaneous voice alerts. Table 6-14 shows
TAWS-B alert types with corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When the system issues an alert, the system displays annunciations on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert
Annunciation is shown to left of the Selected Altitude readout on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on
the MFD. If the TAWS-B Page is not displayed at the time of the alert, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To
acknowledge the MFD pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PFD Alert Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
MFD Pop-up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
Figure 6-90 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain Display Enabled
Icon
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 6-91 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Alert Type
PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
Voice Alert
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
or
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
AFCS
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
*
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
APPENDICES
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
* “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”*
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
*
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Voice Callout
(VCO) “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
* “Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”*
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
*
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*
or
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
INDEX
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on MFD pages with terrain display enabled.
Table 6-14 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
340
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide suitable notification when the
aircraft is determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed. Figure 6-92 shows the
parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
Caut
3500
”
RATE
EIS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
3000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2500
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
Descent Rate (FPM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
0
0
500
Figure 6-92 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of TAWS-B compares the aircraft’s projected flight
path with known terrain and obstacles in their respective databases and issues four types of alerts as either a
caution or a warning:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-93. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-B Page.
APPENDICES
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts
are accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when
the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-93.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level (FT)
Descending (FT)
800
EIS
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Figure 6-93 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLTA alerts are automatically disabled when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-94).
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Height Above Destination (Feet)
AFCS
700
600
500
400
300
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
Distance to Destination (NM)
INDEX
Figure 6-94 PDA Alerting Threshold
342
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PDA and FLTA visual annunciations and voice alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used
when inhibiting TAWS-B and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When TAWS-B is inhibited,
the alert annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and in the TAWS-B annunciation window of the
MFD (Figure 6-95).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-95 TAWS-B Alerting Disabled
(TAWS-B Inhibited) Annunciation
EIS
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If TAWS-B alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach,
a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft altitude is at
least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments Section for
details.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FIVE-HUNDRED VOICE CALLOUT (VCO) ALERT
AFCS
The purpose of the voice alert “Five-hundred” is to provide an advisory alert of when the aircraft descends
to within 500 feet above the terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within five nm of an airport,
the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft is more
than five nm of the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height above terrain. There
are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the voice alert.
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:
APPENDICES
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 2 nm or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
Figures 6-96 and 6-97 shows the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b for altitude loss and
climb rate respectively.
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1000
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
100
0
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-96 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
AFCS
100
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-97 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
344
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a system test of its alerting capabilities. The system test can also be
manually initiated. A voice alert is issued at test completion. TAWS-B System Testing is disabled when ground
speed exceeds 30 knots.
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-98).
EIS
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-98 TAWS-B Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is generated
along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
AFCS
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-B Page. The voice alert “TAWS Not
Available” is generated. When the GPS signal integrity returns and the aircraft is within the installed database
coverage area, the voice alert “TAWS Available” is generated
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD† Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Test in progress
System Test pass
None
TAWS-B PDA and FLTA Alerting
Inhibited
EIS
No GPS position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or aircraft is outside of terrain
database coverage area
TAWS-B System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS operating with PFD Terrain
or Obstacle databases
None
TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Voice Alert
TAWS TEST
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”*
None
“TAWS Not Available”*
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
† Annunciation is shown on TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “TAWS Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered. This voice alert occurs only when the aircraft is in the air.
Table 6-15 TAWS-B System Status Annunciations
346
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.7 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the displays.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
EIS
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS), Traffic Alert
and Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS), and to TIS. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown
without altitude separation data or climb descent indication.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: TIS is disabled if another traffic system is installed.
TIS Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the
Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated
every 5 seconds. The G1000 displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet below to
3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. Traffic is displayed using the symbology shown in Table 6-16.
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
AFCS
Table 6-16 TIS Traffic Symbols
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A Traffic Advisory (TA) indicates that the current track of the intruder could result in a collision. When traffic
meets the advisory criteria for the TA, a solid yellow circle symbol is generated. A TA which is detected, but is
outside the range of the map, is indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map and a half TA symbol
at the relative bearing of the intruder.
APPENDICES
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-103) or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page on
which traffic can be displayed (Figure 6-99).
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
EIS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal page for viewing traffic information. Additional displays of traffic
information are available as map overlays while TIS is operating, and serve as additional reference to the Traffic
Map Page. Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• PFD Inset Map
• Nearest Pages
• Navigation Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Traffic Map Page
• AUX - Video Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Trip Planning Page
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an icon is shown to indicate the feature is
enabled for display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Traffic Advisory
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic Status
Banners
Traffic Display
Enabled
APPENDICES
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Figure 6-99 TIS Traffic on the Navigation Map Page
INDEX
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
348
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-100).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-101).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-102).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
349
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-100 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-101 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-102 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal page for viewing TIS data. Aircraft
orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to
Operating Mode and the G1000 begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion for
more information.
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
APPENDICES
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
350
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Mode Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 4.0 nm,
500’ Above,
Descending
EIS
Range
Marking
Rings
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciations
Select
to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-103 Traffic Map Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
400’ Below, Level
TIS ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
AFCS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
351
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-104 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
AFCS
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TNA MUTE Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
SYSTEM STATUS
INDEX
The G1000 performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
352
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
a failure is detected in the data stream*
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DATA FAILED
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
The transponder has failed*
UNAVAILABLE
TIS is unavailable or out of range
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
EIS
Table 6-17 TIS Failure Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
System Test
has Failed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Data Not
Received from
Transponder
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-105 TIS Power-up Test Failure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
353
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TIS Operating
OPERATING
TIS Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TIS Failed*
FAIL
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
EIS
* See Table 6-19 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-18 TIS Modes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Switching between TIS modes:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key. The
annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner
of maps on which traffic can be displayed (Table 6-19).
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
AFCS
TA OFF SCALE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA X.X ± XX ↕
AGE MM:SS
APPENDICES
TRFC COAST
TRFC RMVD
INDEX
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic data has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-19 TIS Traffic Status Banner Annunciations
354
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.8 AVIDYNE TAS600 TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: The Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is intended for advisory use only to aid the pilot in visually
acquiring traffic. No avoidance maneuvers should be based solely upon TAS traffic information. It is the
responsibility of the pilot in command to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the displays.
NOTE: Refer to the pilot documentation from the TAS manufacturer for a detailed discussion of the TAS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: TIS is disabled if a TAS is installed.
TAS SYMBOLOGY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TAS
uses an on-board interrogator-processor and the Mode S transponder for the air-to-air traffic data link. Traffic is
displayed using the symbols shown in Table 6-20.
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAS Symbol
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
AFCS
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-20 TAS Symbol Description
APPENDICES
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 5 nm range, but
is still not considered a threat.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated
by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information can
displayed on the following maps as an additional reference:
• PFD Inset Map
• Nearest Pages
• Navigation Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Trip Planning Page
• AUX - Video Page
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Operating
Mode
Non-Threat Traffic, 2500’
Above, Descending
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Display
Range Rings
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Climbing
Proximity Traffic,
900’ Above,
Level
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
APPENDICES
Figure 6-106 Traffic Map Page
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 24 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
INDEX
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
356
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TAS is
enabled for display.
EIS
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic
Advisory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA Off Scale Banner
Annunciation
Traffic Status
Icon
“No Bearing”
Traffic Advisory
Banner Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-107 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map Page
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Select the INSET Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
AFCS
3) Select the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Select the softkey again to remove traffic data.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ALTITUDE DISPLAY
The Pilot can select the volume of airspace in which traffic is displayed. Traffic Advisories (TAs) outside of
these limits will still be shown. Refer to the TAS600 Series Pilot’s Guide for specific display thresholds.
Changing the altitude display mode:
APPENDICES
1) On the Traffic Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
•
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
357
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
3) To return to the Traffic Page, select the BACK Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select the ENT Softkey.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE DISPLAY RANGE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob from 2 to 24 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) The following range options are available:
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-108).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-109).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-110).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
INDEX
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
358
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-108 Navigation Map Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-109 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
Figure 6-110 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Traffic Group
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: Refer to the TAS600 documentation for information on alerts generated by the TAS equipment.
APPENDICES
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A “Traffic” voice alert is generated followed by the clock position, relative altitude and range of the TA.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and
remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
359
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-111 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAS VOICE ALERTS
To listen to an update of Traffic Advisories select the MUTE Softkey twice.
Muting the TAS voice alert in progress:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select the MUTE Softkey while the voice alert is playing. Subsequent voice alerts will be heard.
SYSTEM STATUS
NOTE: Refer to the TAS600 documentation for information about its modes.
AFCS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Mode
TAS Operating
TAS Failed*
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
OPERATING
FAIL
APPENDICES
* See Table 6-22 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-21 TAS Modes
INDEX
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
360
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DATA FAILED
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
Table 6-22 TAS Failure Annunciations
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
NO TRFC DATA
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRFC FAIL
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display
range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within
the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic
Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending)
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA X.X ± XX ↕
Description
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TA OFF SCALE
EIS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
AFCS
Table 6-23 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.9 ADS-B TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: The Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B) system is intended for advisory use
only to aid the pilot in visually acquiring traffic. No avoidance maneuvers should be based solely upon
ADS-B traffic information. It is the responsibility of the pilot in command to see and maneuver to avoid
traffic.
EIS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the displays.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic function allows you to view other traffic in
the area, when a GDL 90 data link radio is installed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADS-B is a surveillance technology being deployed in parts of the United States, Europe, China, Australia,
and other locations. ADS-B broadcasts a radio transmission approximately once per second containing the
aircraft’s position, velocity, identification, and other information. ADS-B can also receive reports from other
suitably equipped aircraft within reception range. Additionally, these broadcasts can be received by Ground
Based Transceivers (GBTs) and used to provide air traffic surveillance services. No ground infrastructure is
necessary for ADS-B equipped aircraft to detect each other.
APPENDICES
AFCS
Figure 6-112 ADS-B System
In the United States, two different data links have been adopted for use with ADS-B: 1090 MHz Extended
Squitter (1090 ES) and the Universal Access Transceiver (UAT). The GDL 90 is a Universal Access Transceiver
(UAT). The UAT link is intended for use by aircraft that primarily operate at 18,000 feet and below. The UAT
link supports Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B).
INDEX
ADS-B enables improved surveillance services, both air-to-air and air-to-ground, especially in areas where
radar is ineffective due to terrain or where it is impractical or cost prohibitive. Initial applications of air-to-air
ADS-B are for “advisory” use only, enhancing a pilot’s visual acquisition of other nearby equipped aircraft either
when airborne or on the airport surface.
362
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B is intended to be used both in-flight and on the airport surface. ADS-B systems should be turned “on”
-- and remain “on” -- whenever operating in the air and on the airport surface, unless a change to “standby”
was requested by ATC.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ADS-B cockpit display of traffic is NOT intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does
not relieve the pilot’s responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. ADS-B shall not be used for avoidance
maneuvers during IMC or other times when there is no visual contact with the other target aircraft. ADS-B is
intended only to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft. No avoidance maneuvers are provided for, nor
authorized, as a direct result of an ADS-B target being displayed in the cockpit.
EIS
NOTE: Use of ADS-B surveillance services is limited to the service volume of the Ground-Based Transceiver
(GBT). The coverage volume of GBTs is limited to line-of-sight..
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B traffic operation is similar to the TAS system discussed previously, with the exception of symbology.
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in Tables 6-20 and 6-21. Above or below the traffic symbol
is the traffic identifier, and altitude. A small up or down arrow next to the traffic symbol indicates that the traffic
is climbing or descending at a rate of at least 500 feet per minute. The vector line that extends beyond the
point of the traffic arrow is just further indication of the intruder aircraft track.
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
AFCS
Non-threat traffic with no directional information.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Non-threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when own aircraft is below 1,000 feet AGL or on the ground.
APPENDICES
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when own aircraft is below 1,000 feet AGL or on
the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when own aircraft is below 1,000 feet AGL or on the ground.
Traffic with directional information, but positional accuracy is degraded. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
INDEX
Table 6-24 ADS-B Traffic Symbology
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The following Traffic symbols are displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADS-B Symbol on the
PFD (SVS Only)
Description
Proximity Advisory (PA)
EIS
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Non-threat traffic
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-25 PFD ADS-B Symbology (SVS Only)
NOTE: Traffic Alerts are only provided for target aircraft within 1.0 nautical mile. Traffic that is more than
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1.0 nautical mile is depicted using the bullet symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aircraft
Identification
(tail number
or Flight ID
number)
AFCS
Intruder
Aircraft
Ground Track
.
Relative Altitude
(in this case 1200
feet above own
aircraft)
Altitude Trend
(up arrow
indicates
climbing, down
arrow indicates
descending)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-113 Example ADS-B Traffic Advisory
364
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OPERATING MODES
The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The GDL 90 listens to the transponder and follows the transponder mode. The only additional ADS-B
mode control is altitude mode.
Operating
Mode
Traffic with degraded
positional accuracy
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Advisory, Aircraft is 1200’
Above and Climbing
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-threat
traffic, Aircraft
is 5000’ Above,
with Directional
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-threat
traffic, Aircraft
is 5000’ Above,
Descending,
Undetermined
Direction
Non-Aircraft Ground Traffic,
1000’ Below
AFCS
“Non-Bearing” Traffic,
Distance is 8.0 nm, 1100’
Above and Descending
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Proximity
Traffic, 1200’
Above,
Climbing, with
Directional
Information
Figure 6-114 ADS-B Traffic Map Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
APPENDICES
Changing the altitude display mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, press the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following softkeys:
•
BELOW, NORMAL, ABOVE, or UNREST (unrestricted)
INDEX
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
•
BELOW, NORMAL, ABOVE, or UNREST (unrestricted)
2) Press the ENT Key.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) The following range options are available:
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Showing/Hiding Flight IDs on the Traffic Map Page:
On the Traffic Map Page, press the FLT ID Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) If necessary, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Show Flight IDs’ or ‘Hide Flight IDs’ (choice dependent on
current state.)
3) Press the ENT Key.
The Traffic Map Page displays the following information:
AFCS
• Current aircraft location
• Surrounding traffic
• Range marking rings
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Current traffic mode
• OPERATING
• FAIL
APPENDICES
• Traffic alert messages
• FAILED
• DATA FAILED
• NO DATA
INDEX
• UNAVAILABLE
366
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The approved Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) always supersedes the information in this Pilot’s Guide.
NOTE: A failure of the primary (#1) Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) results in loss of the flight director. Any
IAU failure results in loss of the autopilot and manual electric trim.
EIS
NOTE: Refer to the approved Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) to determine whether optional SBAS functionality
is approved.
• GSA 80 AFCS Yaw Damper Servo (1)
• GDU 1045 Multi-Function Display (MFD)
• GSA 81 AFCS Servo (3)
• GIA 63(W) Integrated Avionics Units (2)
• GSM 85 Servo Mounts (4)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional GFC 700 is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the G1000
System avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram (Figure 1-1) to support
this system description. GFC 700 AFCS functionality in Diamond DA42-L360 aircraft is distributed across the
following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
The GFC 700 AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within the primary (#1) IAU. Flight director
commands are displayed on the PFD. The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
– Pitch/roll mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
AFCS
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servo and provides servo
monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands, AHRS attitude and
rate information, and airspeed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn
coordination in response to yaw rate, roll angle, vertical acceleration, and airspeed.
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric trim capability when the
autopilot is not engaged.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following dedicated AFCS keys are located on the bezel of the MFD:
AP Key
FD Key
Engages/disengages the autopilot
2
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Pressing once turns on the flight director in the default pitch and roll modes. Pressing
again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command Bars. If the autopilot
is engaged, the key is disabled.
3 NAV Key
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
4 ALT Key
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
5 VS Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
6 FLC Key
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
7 YD Key
Engages/disengages the yaw damper
8 HDG Key
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
9 APR Key
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
10 VNV Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
11 NOSE UP/NOSE Control the mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change
modes
DN Keys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
1
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1045
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
10
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11
6
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-1 Dedicated MFD AFCS Controls
368
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following AFCS controls are located in the cockpit separately from the MFD:
AP DISC Switch
(Autopilot Disconnect)
Disengages the autopilot and interrupts pitch trim operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This switch may be used to mute the aural autopilot disconnect alert.
The AP DISC Switch is located on each control stick.
While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is
CWS Button
(Control Wheel Steering) engaged and synchronizes the flight director’s Command Bars with the current
aircraft pitch (if not in Glideslope Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold Mode)
EIS
Upon release of the CWS Button, the flight director may establish new
reference points, depending on the current pitch and roll modes. CWS
operation details are discussed in the flight director modes section.
GA Button (Go Around)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The CWS Button is located on the top of the left control stick.
Disengages the autopilot and selects flight director Go Around Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed
approach when the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation
source is VOR/LOC and a valid frequency has been tuned.
The GA Button is located on the left throttle handle.
AP TRIM Switch
(Autopilot Trim)
Used to command manual electric trim (MET)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is
the ARM contact and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP
(rearward) contacts. The AP TRIM ARM switch can be used to disengage
the autopilot and to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
associated aural tone.
AFCS
Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch
are operated simultaneously. If either side of the switch is active separately for
more than three seconds, MET function is disabled and ‘PTRM’ is displayed
as the AFCS Status Annunciation on the PFD. The function remains disabled
until both sides of the switch are inactivated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The AP TRIM Switch is located on the left control stick.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the flight director activated, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (-15°/+20°) and roll (22°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
EIS
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 (when the flight director is not active) activates the flight director
in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the display by
pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
ALT Key
VS Key
VNV Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
NAV Key
Navigation**
APR Key
Approach**
HDG Key
Heading Select
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FD Key
AP Key
CWS Button
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GA Button
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Modes Selected
ROL
ROL
ROL
TO
GA
ROL
ROL
ROL
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Takeoff (on ground)
TO
Go Around (in air)
GA
Altitude Hold
ALT
Vertical Speed
VS
Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
370
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS STATUS BOX
Lateral Modes
Active
Vertical Modes
Active
Mode
Reference
EIS
Armed
Yaw
Autopilot Damper
Status
Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the flight director is active. Autopilot
status is displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral flight director modes are displayed on the left
and vertical on the right. Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green.
Armed
AFCS Status Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command
Bars
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
AFCS
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
COMMAND BARS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed on the PFD as a single magenta cue. The
Command Bars move together vertically to indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll
commands. The Command Bars do not override the aircraft symbol.
If the attitude information sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars are
removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if either pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.
EIS
Command Bars
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft Symbol
Figure 7-3 Command Bars
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll mode(s).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s)
for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode
annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
APPENDICES
Figure 7-4 Loss of VOR Signal
INDEX
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
372
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.3 VERTICAL MODES
Pitch Hold
Flight Level Change
VNV Target Altitude Capture
Glidepath***
-15° to +20°
0.5°
nnnn fpm
-3000 to
+1500 fpm
100 fpm
nnn kt
90 to 180 kt
1 kt
PIT
*
ALTS
ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
VS Key
VS
FLC Key FLC
VNV
Key
VPTH
**
ALTV
APR
Key
GA
Button
GP
GS
GA
6°
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Go Around
(default)
AFCS
Glideslope
Reference
Change
Increment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Path Tracking
Reference
Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Speed
Holds aircraft pitch attitude; may
be used to climb/descend to the
Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
Holds current Altitude Reference
Holds aircraft vertical speed; may
be used to climb/descend to the
Selected Altitude
Holds aircraft airspeed while
aircraft is climbing/descending to
the Selected Altitude
Captures and tracks descent legs
of an active vertical profile
Captures the Vertical Navigation
(VNV) Target Altitude
Captures and tracks the SBAS
glidepath on approach
Captures and tracks the ILS
glideslope on approach
Disengages the autopilot and
commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level
Control Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold
Description
EIS
Vertical Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 7-2 lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode reference is
displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes.
The NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating under Pitch
Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. Increments of change and acceptable ranges of values for
each of these references using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys are also listed in the table.
* ALTS is armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, or GA is active, and under VPTH when the Selected Altitude is to be captured
instead of the VNV Target Altitude.
APPENDICES
** ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of the Selected Altitude.
***GP is available in installations with GIA 63W IAUs when SBAS is available.
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active pitch mode by the green annunciation ‘PIT’. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
EIS
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the
nose-up/down limit.
CHANGING THE PITCH REFERENCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
374
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Go Around
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude is to
be captured instead of the VNV Target Altitude)
• Flight Level Change
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pitch Hold
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-5 for example).
The ALT Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected Altitude Capture
Mode becomes active.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-6). This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT” annunciation. The
Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active pitch mode field and flashes green
for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
AFCS
CHANGING THE SELECTED ALTITUDE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
Use of the ALT Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active causes
the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the new
Selected Altitude.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current aircraft
altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference, shown in the
AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter. Altitude Hold Mode
active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode (see
Figure 7-6). Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude
error is less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.
EIS
CHANGING THE ALTITUDE REFERENCE
NOTE: Turning the ALT Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the flight
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
With the CWS Button depressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new Altitude Reference. When the
CWS Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the Altitude Reference.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Altitude
Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode
376
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current aircraft
vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed
Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the
Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected.
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS Status
Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on
the indicator.
EIS
CHANGING THE VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing
the CWS Button
Vertical
Speed
Reference
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Reference
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
APPENDICES
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter). When
Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed, and
altitude.
EIS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the Airspeed
Reference along the tape.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHANGING THE AIRSPEED REFERENCE
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to a new airspeed, then releasing the CWS Button to
establish the new Airspeed Reference
Selected
Airspeed Altitude Capture
Reference Mode Armed
AFCS
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspeed
Reference
APPENDICES
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
INDEX
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
Figure 7-9 Flight Level Change Mode (IAS)
378
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or dead reckoning mode is active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on
VNV flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight control
modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon reaching
the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and cancels any
armed VNV modes.
VERTICAL PATH TRACKING MODE (VPTH)
NOTE: If another pitch mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
AFCS
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Button.
APPENDICES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope Mode
is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable, the
appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the Selected
Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
INDEX
Figure 7-10 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within 5 minutes of descent path interception by:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pressing the VNV Key
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
EIS
If acknowledgment is not received within 1 minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the Navigation Status Box
and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and vertical
speed required) appear on the PFD in magenta (Figure 7-11).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed, (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude Below
VNV Target
VNV Target
Altitude
AFCS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-11 Vertical Path Capture
380
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile. An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as appropriate.
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
VNV Target
Altitude
EIS
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indication
(RVSI)
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-12 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
AFCS
If the Altimeter’s barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path (without
commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to reestablish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director to
revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in the
vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by flight plan
changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
EIS
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
Non-Path Descents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode to
allow profile re-capture.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-13 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
382
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VNV TARGET ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTV)
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
EIS
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-11).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains displayed
above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed once VNV
Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate
the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing upcoming
descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
Altitude Reference (In
This Case, Equal To
VNV Altitude Target)
AFCS
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-14 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
APPENDICES
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
INDEX
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the
flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture
mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending
on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP) (SBAS ONLY)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.
EIS
Glidepath Mode is available only in installations with GIA 63W IAUs when SBAS is available. Glidepath
Mode is used to track the SBAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is annunciated in white
in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the APR Key.
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA) and
are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
AFCS
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
Figure 7-15 Glidepath Mode Armed
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF)
• Vertical deviation is valid
• The CDI is at less than full scale deviation
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
384
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS Approach
Mode Active
Glidepath
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath
Figure 7-16 Glidepath Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LNAV/VNAV
Approach
Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Glidepath
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
EIS
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources).
3) Press the APR Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-17 Glideslope Mode Armed
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the glideslope,
the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Mode Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active ILS
Frequency
Tuned
INDEX
NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent
on Localizer/Glideslope Path
Figure 7-18 Glideslope Mode
386
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
Glideslope
Indicator
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GO AROUND MODE (GA)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pushing the GA Switch engages the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude, allowing the execution
of a missed approach or a go around. This mode is a coupled pitch and roll mode and is annunciated as ‘GA’
in both the active pitch and roll mode fields. Go Around Mode disengages the autopilot and arms Selected
Altitude Capture Mode automatically. Subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts to modify the
aircraft attitude (i.e., with the CWS Button or NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys) result in reversion to Pitch and Roll
Hold modes.
Go Around Mode Active
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot Disconnect Annunciation
Flashes Yellow for 5 sec
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command Bars Indicate Climb
Figure 7-19 Go Around Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.4 LATERAL MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GFC 700 offers the lateral modes listed in Table 7-3. Refer to the vertical modes section for information
regarding Go Around Mode.
Lateral Mode
Description
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the
HDG
Selected Heading
Key
EIS
Roll Hold
Heading Select
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Annunciation
Navigation, GPS
Navigation, VOR Enroute Capture/Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
Navigation Backcourse Capture/Track
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS,
VOR, LOC)
Captures and tracks a
localizer signal for backcourse
approaches
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
HDG
25º
GPS
25º
25º Capture
10º Track
25º Capture
10º Track
LOC
GPS
Approach, VOR Capture/Track
Approach, LOC Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)
AFCS
25º
BC
Approach, GPS
Go Around
ROL
VOR
NAV
Key
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS,
VOR, LOC)
Disengages the autopilot and
commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level
APR
Key
VAPP
LOC
GA
Button
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
GA
25º Capture
10º Track
25º
25º Capture
10º Track
25º Capture
10º Track
Wings Level
The GFC 700 limits turn rate to 3 degrees per second (standard rate turn).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
INDEX
APPENDICES
The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
modes. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS
Button.
388
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
level.
When the flight director is activated, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is annunciated as
‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle conditions listed
in Table 7-4.
EIS
Figure 7-20 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
> 25°
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
CHANGING THE ROLL REFERENCE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Button.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains the
Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box to the upper
left of the HSI.
CHANGING THE SELECTED HEADING
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
EIS
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the
aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading
upon release of the CWS Button.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes
of more than 340° at a time result in turn reversals.
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Select
Mode Active
Selected
Heading
Bug
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Heading
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Track Selected Heading
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-21 Heading Select Mode
390
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at
approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
EIS
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering commands
from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC
approaches where glideslope capture is not required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft
heading. Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The
annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI is less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV Key
is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active roll mode.
Figure 7-22 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
AFCS
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed when the automatic navigation source switch takes place. If the APR Key is pressed prior to the
automatic navigation source switch, LOC Navigation Mode is armed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
APPENDICES
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
• During a LOC/ILS approach the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
CHANGING THE SELECTED COURSE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Selected Course is controlled using the CRS Knob (while in VOR, LOC, or OBS Mode). Pressing the
CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in Navigation Mode.
The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button is
released.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Command Bars Indicate Left Turn
to Track GPS Course and Climb
to Intercept Selected Altitude
Selected
Course
Figure 7-23 Navigation Mode
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Backcourse
Mode Active
LOC2 is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
Figure 7-24 Backcourse Mode
392
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected navigation
receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the CDI is greater
than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active lateral mode). If
the CDI is less than one dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
EIS
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
AFCS
Figure 7-25 GPS Approach Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC Approach
Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the difference
between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
CHANGING THE SELECTED COURSE
AFCS
The Selected Course is controlled using the CRS Knob (while in VOR, LOC, or OBS Mode). Pressing the
CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in Approach Mode.
The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button is
released.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
APPENDICES
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
INDEX
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
394
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.5 AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the AFM for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot and yaw damper operate flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control. The
autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the flight director. Pitch
autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort required by the pitch
servo. The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and coordinates turns.
EIS
FLIGHT CONTROL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos, based on the active flight director modes. Servo motor
control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo mounts are equipped with slip-clutches set to
certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency.
PITCH AXIS AND PITCH TRIM
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during upsets and flight
director maneuvers. Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch
damper control, and sent to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and
provides this signal to the pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average
pitch servo effort.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric trim.
This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control stick switch rather than the trim wheel. Manual trim
commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated simultaneously. Trim
speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
ROLL AXIS
AFCS
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during upsets and flight director
maneuvers. The flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper
control, and sent to the roll servo motor.
YAW AXIS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response.
It also uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns. Yaw damper operation is independent of autopilot
engagement.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
EIS
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director are activated (if not already
engaged). The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold modes when initially activated. When the YD
Key is pressed, the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot (if not already engaged).
Autopilot and yaw damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated
by green ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot
Engaged
Figure 7-26 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver. CWS activity has no effect on yaw damper engagement. The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily
replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to the flight
director modes section for CWS behavior in each mode.
AFCS
Control Wheel Steering
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-27 CWS Annunciation
396
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC Switch, GA Button, AP TRIM ARM Switch, or
the AP Key on the MFD. Manual disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation
and a two-second autopilot disconnect aural alert. After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural
alert may be cancelled by pushing the AP TRIM ARM or AP DISC Switch (AP DISC Switch also cancels the
flashing ‘AP’ annunciation).
The YD Key or AP DISC Switch can be used to disengage the yaw damper. The ‘YD’ annunciation turns
yellow and flashes for five seconds upon disengagement.
EIS
Figure 7-28 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red ‘AP’ annunciation and by the autopilot
disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC or AP TRIM ARM
Switch.
Automatic disengagement occurs due to:
• Invalid sensor data
• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
• Stall Warning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• System failure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-29 Automatic Autopilot Disengagement
AFCS
Automatic yaw damper disengagement occurs when autopilot disengagement is caused by a failure in a
parameter also affecting the yaw damper. This means that the yaw damper can remain operational in some
cases where the autopilot automatically disengages. The yaw damper also disengages upon a localized failure
in the yaw damper system.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-29 Automatic Autopilot Disengagement
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.6 EXAMPLE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are
for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
EIS
This scenario-based set of procedures (based on the example flight plan found in the Flight Management
Section) shows various GFC 700 AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles
B. Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the
aircraft climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following ATC vectors.
0
24
27
24
27
24
30
21
18
15
18
9
24
21
12
15
27
12
6
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
Topeka
VOR
(TOP)
21
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
V 244
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
12
3
V4
18
V 244
9
6
0
33
KMKC
27
30
6
KCOS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
30
3
6
0
33
3
30
33
9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
33
0
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using GPS navigation.
The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed approach
is executed.
12
21
15
18
AFCS
Figure 7-30 Flight Plan Overview
DEPARTURE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
1) Before takeoff, set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet using the ALT Knob.
2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change Mode may be used).
APPENDICES
a) Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed Mode.
INDEX
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the NOSE UP/
NOSE DN Keys or pushing the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new Vertical Speed
Reference.
398
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb using Vertical Speed Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.
Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
EIS
4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HD
GM
od
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
e
3
AFCS
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
4
1
2
VS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
KMKC
e
Mod
APPENDICES
Figure 7-31 Departure
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
INTERCEPTING A VOR RADIAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
EIS
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
b) Press the CDI Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Use the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course to 255°. Note that at this point, the flight director is still in
Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly 290°.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
d) Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of
the active lateral mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0
3
Hd
29 g
0o
30
AFCS
33
V4
6
o
255
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
24
VO
R
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
27
3
NA
V
Mo
de
2
HD
G
12
M
od
e,
VO
R
Ar
m
ed
15
21
18
APPENDICES
1
INDEX
Figure 7-32 Intercepting a VOR Radial
400
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE
NOTE: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
EIS
1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
a) Press the CDI Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight
plan leg.
0
33
30
3
V4
6
3
o
075
30
e
V Mod
PS NA
6
27
G
o
AFCS
12
21
18
12
15
24
9
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
V 244
2
24
27
076
1
d
AV Mo
VOR N
9
o
260
e
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
0
33
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under GPS guidance. Note that in GPS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
15
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
21
18
Figure 7-33 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DESCENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
• Flight Level Change descent – Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for the descent:
• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
EIS
• Non-path descent in a VNV scenario – A VNV flight plan is entered and enabled, however Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the VNV Target Altitude prior to reaching the
planned TOD. Flight Level Change Mode is used in the example.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Level Change descent:
1) Select Flight Level Change Mode:
a) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Press the FLC Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears next to the
Airspeed Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed
automatically.
2) Use the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys or push the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to adjust the
commanded airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level
Change Mode while the autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
AFCS
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
2
FLC
Mod
e
3
INDEX
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
Figure 7-34 FLC Descent
402
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNV flight control:
a) Press the VNV Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the flight plan’s VNV Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.
EIS
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 ft below the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director captures the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active (ALTS is
armed rather than ALTV).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following
• Press the VNV Key
• Turn the ALT Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNV Target Altitude is indicated by the
white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AFCS
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
ALT Mode
TOD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
2
APPENDICES
VPT
HM
ode
3
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
BOD
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
INDEX
3 nm
OPSHN
Figure 7-35 VPTH Descent
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Non-path descent using Flight Level Change Mode:
1) Using Flight Level Change Mode, command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next VNV
flight plan altitude:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNV flight plan altitudes.
EIS
b) Press the FLC Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off, reset Selected Altitude at
or below 9,000 ft.
AFCS
4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
404
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VP
TH
M
od
e
ALT Mode
1
FL
C
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
Pla
nn
M
od
e
Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Planned
TOD
2
BOD
3
ed
De
sce
nt
Pa
th
ALT Mode
TOD
4
VP
TH
Mo
5
BOD
ALT Mode
EIS
VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL
de
Selected Altitude
OPSHN
HABUK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3 nm
Figure 7-36 Non-path Descent
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
APPROACH
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
AFCS
2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.
APPENDICES
c) The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the flight director determines when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The flight
director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
INDEX
• Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
KCOS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LOC APR/
GS Mode
3
PETEY
2
HD
G
od
M
e
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS NAV Mode
EIS
PYNON
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-37 ILS Approach to KCOS
NOTE: Refer to the AFM to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved. Support for SBAS precision
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
approaches is available only in installations with GIA 63Ws when SBAS is available.
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to GPS (use CDI Softkey to change navigation source).
AFCS
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.
APPENDICES
3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.
4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the Decision height and land the aircraft.
INDEX
• Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
406
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
KCOS
4
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
GPS APR/
GP Mode
CEGIX
2
FALUR
HABUK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PYNON
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS NAV Mode
AFCS
Figure 7-38 LPV Approach to KCOS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
NOTE: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
EIS
1) Push the GA Button at the Decision Height and apply go around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI also
switches to GPS as the navigation source.
Note that when the GA Button is pushed, the missed approach is activated and the autopilot disconnects,
indicated by the ‘AP’ annunciation flashing yellow for 5 seconds.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flashes 5 sec
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).
a) Press the AP Key to re-engage the autopilot.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
3) Use the ALT Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
AFCS
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the FLC Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
APPENDICES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
INDEX
4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box, above the AFCS Status Box.
408
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS NAV Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MOGAL
3
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GA Mode
KCOS
1
AFCS
Figure 7-39 Go Around/Missed Approach
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.7 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AFCS STATUS ALERTS
The annunciations in Table 7-5 (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD above the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by
criticality.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
AFCS Status Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-40 AFCS Status Annunciation
410
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Rudder Mistrim Right
Aileron Mistrim Right
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
Pitch Trim Failure
Yaw Damper Failure
Roll servo providing sustained force in indicated direction
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move AP TRIM switches separately to unstick
YD control failure
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be available
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight
system tests. Doing so may cause the preflight system test to fail or never
to start. Cycle power to the servos if this occurs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preflight Test
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Roll Failure
System Failure
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(or Stuck AP TRIM
Switch)
Yaw servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
EIS
Elevator Mistrim Up
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Rudder Mistrim Left
Annunciation
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Alert Condition
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
AFCS
Table 7-5 AFCS Status Alerts
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director and pitch commands are limited for overspeed protection.
Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and maintain the mode
reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding the certified maximum autopilot airspeed.
EIS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference
adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in Altitude Hold, Glideslope or Glidepath Modes.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-41 Overspeed Annunciation
ANNUNCIATIONS FOR KAP 140 AUTOPILOT SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the autopilot manufacturer’s Pilot’s Guide for more information.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When GPS approach mode becomes active and the necessary approach criteria are met, a message appears
in the AFCS Status Box alerting the pilot to a change in autopilot NAV source (“NAV Source Changed – Select
Desired Autopilot Mode”). The annunciation shall blink for five seconds and remain in the AFCS Status Box
for 30 seconds.
APPENDICES
Figure 7-42 KAP 140 Annunciation (Informative)
NOTE: KAP 140 equipped aircraft only: Each time the CDI Softkey is pressed or the navigation source
INDEX
is changed (i.e. missed approach), the following message appears in the message window, “NAV Source
Changed – Select Desired Autopilot Mode.”
412
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry another
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the G1000 include the following:
• Synthetic Vision System (SVS)(optional)
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
EIS
• ChartView (optional) and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• AOPA Airport Directory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment (optional)
• Scheduler
• Flight Data Logging
• Auxiliary Video (Optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features on
the PFD. SVS imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as the
flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
AFCS
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
AOPA’s Airport Directory offers detailed information for a selected airport, such as available services, hours of
operation, and lodging options.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles
more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices
and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
Switch fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Alerts Window on the PFD.
APPENDICES
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
The G1000 system provides a control and display interface to an optional auxiliary video system.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION SYSTEM (SVS) (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVS is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SVS terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed
even if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid
with lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the
terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) is a visual enhancement to the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck. SVS
depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of
view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVS information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode (Figure 8‑85). The depicted imagery is
derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second database of
terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that
the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the
operation of SVS. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVS to
be disabled until the required data is restored.
Terrain awareness (Terrain-SVS) is integrated within SVS to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the
presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red
and yellow shading on the PFD.
AFCS
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Terrain–SVS terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVS.
• Pathways
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following SVS enhancements appear on the PFD:
414
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVS OPERATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVS is enabled, the pitch scale increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
AFCS
SVS functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function Softkeys,
including synthetic vision. Pressing the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVS feature softkeys. The softkeys are
labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to the previous
level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVS feature may be activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS,
and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power
is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY
softkeys is remembered by the system.
APPENDICES
• PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• SYN TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HRZN HDG Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD
SYN VIS
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
BACK
EIS
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.
Figure 8-2 SVS Softkeys
Activating and deactivating SVS:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVS display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.
AFCS
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
INDEX
3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.
416
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVS FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
Airport
Runway
Pathways
Color
Matches CDI
Indicating
NAV Source
Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol
EIS
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic
Terrain
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS
Softkeys
Figure 8-3 SVS on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
AFCS
PATHWAYS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNAV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan (Figure 8-4).
APPENDICES
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line
drawn on the Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Programmed
Altitudes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude
AFCS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and some LNAV
approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used independent
of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the display when
the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the active leg when
leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that would lead to
intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
Departure and Enroute
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVS
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
INDEX
Pathways are displayed along the flight plan route at the highest of either the selected altitude or the
programmed altitude for the leg. Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with
aircraft performance. Flight plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above
the aircraft at the altitude selected or programmed.
418
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 8-5, 8-6). When the flight plan
includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the
selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
AFCS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
APPENDICES
Figure 8-5 SVS Pathways, Enroute and Descent
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MAHP
INDEX
Figure 8-6 SVS Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
420
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
EIS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown (Figure 8-7).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by Terrain-SVS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/
or obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
AFCS
Wind
Vector
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
ZERO PITCH LINE
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
HORIZON HEADING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVS display or may appear as a
EIS
partial symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVS
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVS display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRPORT SIGNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
AFCS
Traffic
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Figure 8-8 Airport Signs
422
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVS runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Runway
Selected for
Approach
Other
Runway
on Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-9 Airport Runways
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERRAIN-SVS ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the red and yellow X symbols on the Inset Map and MFD map displays. For more
detailed information regarding Terrain-SVS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
EIS
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVS field of view to the left or right of the
aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain
Caution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Potential
Impact
Point
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert
424
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset map and MFD moving map display,
obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s
flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the
aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
EIS
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Obstacle
Warning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Potential
Impact
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-11 Obstacle
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FIELD OF VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Field of
View
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
AFCS
Figure 8-12 Option Menus
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Map Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
426
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SVS View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
Figure 8-13 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.2 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• Inset Map (PFD)
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NDB Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
428
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Taxiway
Identification
EIS
Aircraft
Position
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport
Features
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-14 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
DCLTR Softkey
Removes Taxiway
Markings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
pressed for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings and
airport feature labels. Pressing the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol, and intersection
names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport runway layout, unless
the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 Softkey cycles back to the original
map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
AFCS
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
Figure 8-15 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
SAFETAXI
Option
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-16 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
430
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date. When
turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi Database
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-17 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SafeTaxi database has expired.
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found on
the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-18.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 11S1, is deciphered as follows:
11 – Indicates the year 2011
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
EIS
1 – Indicates the first issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–11 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 10–MAR–11 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
AFCS
SafeTaxi Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-18 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
APPENDICES
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue when
data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8‑18 and 8-19). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the
REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8‑19). An expired SafeTaxi database
is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
INDEX
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for PFD1. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
432
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 8-19 illustrates possible SafeTaxi database conditions that may appear on the AUX - System Status Page.
The EFFECTIVE date is the beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the effective date,
the EFFECTIVE date appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue. The EXPIRES date is the revision
date for the next database cycle. NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the database card or
no database card is inserted.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Date is before Effective Date
Figure 8-19 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Database Status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.3 CHARTVIEW (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
EIS
• Approaches
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO-1, INFO-2, DP, STAR, APR, WX,
NOTAM, and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
AFCS
SHW CHRT
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO-1
DP
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HEADER
PLAN
APR
WX
NOTAM
GO BACK
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
INFO-2
ALL
STAR
PROFILE
MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN
BACK
APPENDICES
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
INDEX
Figure 8-20 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
434
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-21 Option Menus
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-22 Chart Not Available Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
INDEX
Figure 8-23 Unable To Display Chart Banner
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
From Menu
INDEX
APPENDICES
Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick
Figure 8-24 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
436
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8‑28). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The
Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
EIS
Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Colorado Springs, CO (KCOS)
Airport Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-25 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart.
If the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey has no effect.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is
within the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is taxiing on Taxiway Alpha on the Charlotte,
NC (KCLT) airport.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using
the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information; the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and
Airline Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aircraft
Current
Position
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-26 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
438
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In the example shown in Figure 8-26, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-27).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-27 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Chart Not
To Scale
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
INDEX
Figure 8-28 Departure Information Page
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
439
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Chart Not
To Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-29 Arrival Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
Figure 8-30 Approach Information Page
440
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such as
METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only when
an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM WX Satellite Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WX Info
When
Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-31 Weather Information Page
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
AFCS
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled as shown in Figure 8-31. The
NOTAM Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
441
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTAM
Softkey
Appears for
Selected
Airports
Figure 8-32 NOTAM Softkey Highlighted
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local
NOTAM on
This Airport
NOTAM
Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-33 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs
INDEX
Pressing the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
442
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-20).
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-34 Approach Information Page, ALL View
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
Figure 8-35 Approach Information Page, Header View
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
Chart Plan
View
Figure 8-36 Approach Information Page, Plan View
444
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-37 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-38 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
445
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
APPENDICES
Figure 8-39 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
INDEX
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
446
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Available
Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full
Screen and Chart
With Info Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-40 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-41 Page Menus
448
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-42 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑43).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
449
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-43 Arrival Information Page, Day View
INDEX
Figure 8-44 Arrival Information Page, Night View
450
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHARTVIEW CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ChartView Database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-45 Power-up Page, ChartView Database
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
451
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing.
The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
EIS
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is
shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 1103, is deciphered as follows:
11 – Indicates the year 2011
03 – Indicates the third issue of the ChartView database for the year
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The EXPIRES date 17–FEB–11 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The DISABLES date 28–APR–11 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
APPENDICES
ChartView
Data
Figure 8-46 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available
INDEX
The ChartView database is obtained directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
452
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-47. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database
cycle is no longer viewable. CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicates no ChartView data is available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
ChartView Database is Disabled
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled
ChartView Database is Not Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-47 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Database Status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.4 FLITECHARTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are
displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. FliteCharts database subscription is available
from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Airport Diagrams
EIS
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO-1, INFO-2, DP, STAR, APR, WX,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SHW CHRT
AFCS
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO-1
INFO-2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ALL
DP
STAR
WX
APR
GO BACK
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-48 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
454
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-49 Option Menus
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-50 Chart Not Available Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
INDEX
Figure 8-51 Unable To Display Chart Banner
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select Desired
Approach
Chart from
Menu
APPENDICES
Pan Chart
With the
Joystick
INDEX
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-52 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
456
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
Pressing the CHRT Softkey alternates between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
FliteCharts and
Navigation Map Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-53 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart.
If the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey has no effect.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-52) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-54) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank.
The Charlotte, NC airport has three additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram, Alternate
Minimums, and Take-off Minimums.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Info Box
Selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-54 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
458
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In the example shown in Figure 8-54, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Take-off Minimums and Departure Procedures Chart (Figure 8-55).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-55 Airport Information Page, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-56 Departure Information Page
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
459
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Figure 8-57 Arrival Information Page
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
INDEX
Figure 8-58 Approach Information Page
460
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM WX Satellite Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the G1000 softkeys
are blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key to complete the selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Info Available
on This Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WX Info
When
Available
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
Figure 8-59 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection
WX Softkey
Selected
APPENDICES
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
461
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-48).
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-60 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected
462
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-61 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
463
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-62 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
464
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-63 Page Menus
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-64 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑65).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
466
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-65 Approach Information Page, Day View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-66 Approach Information Page, Night View
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
467
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts are disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no
longer available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up
Page displays and the definition of each.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-67 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
APPENDICES
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
INDEX
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-68. ‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a
date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’ in yellow, indicates charts are
still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
468
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.
EIS
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is
shown.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 1102, is deciphered as follows:
11 – Indicates the year 2011
02 – Indicates the second issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 10–FEB–11 is the first date that this database is current.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 10–MAR–11 is the last date that this database is current.
The DISABLES date 06–SEP–11 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
FliteCharts
Data
INDEX
Figure 8-68 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
469
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The other four possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EFFECTIVE date, in
yellow, indicates the current date preceeds the date the FliteCharts database becomes effective. The EXPIRES
date, in yellow, is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that
this database cycle is no longer viewable. NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate the FliteCharts database is not
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Disabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current Date is Before Effective Date
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-69 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Datbase Status
470
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.5 AOPA AIRPORT DIRECTORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) Airport Directory database offers detailed information
regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information is viewed on the Airport
Directory Page as shown in Figure 8-70.
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AIRPORT INFORMATION Page. Initially, information for the airport closest
to the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
3) If necessary, press the INFO softkey until INFO-2 is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-70 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
471
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AOPA DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AOPA Airport Directory database is revised four times per year. Check fly.garmin.com for the current
database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date. When turning on the
system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AOPA Database
Figure 8-71 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. AOPA Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
AOPA Airport Directory database has expired.
AFCS
Database card contains no AOPA Airport Directory data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
472
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-72.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 11D1, is deciphered as follows:
11 – Indicates the year 2011
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
1 – Indicates the first issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
EIS
The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–11 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 10–MAR–11 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Directory
Data
AFCS
Figure 8-72 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
473
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.6 SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about XM WX Satellite Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for
the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services
at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is available only on the GDL 69A Data Link
Receiver, not the GDL 69.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 8-73)
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
474
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page Group) is used to save GDL 69A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
activation data when the SiriusXM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal SiriusXM
Radio operation, but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently pressed during flight. Refer to
the GDL 69/69A XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev H or later) for further
information.
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
EIS
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the next to last page in the AUX Page Group.
4) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
6) Press the LOCK Softkey.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
Data
Radio ID
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Audio
Radio ID
AFCS
Weather
Products
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-73 XM Information Page
LOCK Softkey
is Used to Save
Activation Data
During Initial Setup
APPENDICES
RADIO
and INFO
Softkeys
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
If XM WX Satellite Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on
the XM Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather
Data Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.
EIS
3) Press the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active
Channel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Channel
List
Volume
Field
Categories
Field
AFCS
Figure 8-74 XM Radio Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
APPENDICES
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
INDEX
Or:
476
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel
number.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
CATEGORY
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is PRESETS to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-75 Categories List
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
477
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
PRESETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).
EIS
2) Press the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Pressing the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
3) Press any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the SET Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press PRESETS to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
Press MORE to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press SET to
Save Each
Preset Channel
Figure 8-76 Accessing and Selecting XM Preset Channels
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting during 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top
level softkeys.
AFCS
VOLUME
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by pressing the VOL Softkey, which
brings up the MUTE Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the VOL Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
INDEX
3) Press the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Press the MUTE Softkey again to unmute the audio.
Figure 8-77 Volume Control
478
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.7 SCHEDULER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch fuel tanks,
or Altimeter-Transponder Check) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on
a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-78 Scheduler (Utility Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message type:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message text.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting, the
ALERTS Softkey label changes to ADVISORY. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Messages Window
and acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey label reverts to ALERTS when pressed. Pressing the
ALERTS Softkey again removes the Messages Window from the display, and the scheduler message is deleted
from the message queue.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-79 PFD Messages Window
480
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.8 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the G1000 system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the AUX-UTILITY Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the G1000 system is capable of logging for the DA42-L360 aircraft.
• GPS altitude (MSL)
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• GPS vertical alert limit
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
• HSI source
• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
• Selected course
• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
• Com1/Com2 frequency
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level
• Vertical speed (fpm)
• CDI deflection
• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)
• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• OAT (degrees C)
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Fuel Pressure (psi)
• True airspeed (knots)
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Voltage 1 and/or 2
• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Amps 1 and/or 2
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
• Engine RPM
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
• Manifold Pressure (in. Hg)
• Autopilot On/Off
• CHT
• AFCS roll/pitch modes
• EGT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
APPENDICES
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)
AFCS
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)
• GPS horizontal alert limit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Ground Speed (kts)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GPS fix
• Time
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• Date
• AFCS roll/pitch commands
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
481
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in Figure 8-80. This file can be imported
into most computer spreadsheet applications.
Local Date
YYMMDD
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
EIS
log_110210_104506_KIXD.csv
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-80 Log File Format
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Data logging status can be monitored on the AUX-UTILITY Page.
482
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.9 AUXILIARY VIDEO (OPTIONAL)
The G1000 system provides a control and display interface to an optional auxiliary video system.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Images provided on the Aux-Video page are for supplemental use only.
There are four modes of operation of the auxiliary video display: Full-Screen, Full-Screen with Digital Zoom,
Split-Screen with Map, and Split-Screen with Map and Digital Zoom.
Displaying auxiliary video:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select VIDEO and display the AUX-VIDEO Page.
The video display softkeys shown below appear on the AUX - VIDEO Page.
MAP
SETUP
VID ZM+
VID ZM-
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENGINE
MAP ACTV HIDE MAP
VID ACTV
CNTRST +
BRIGHT -
BRIGHT +
SAT -
SAT +
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Previous Level Softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-81 Video Display Softkeys
RESET
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CNTRST -
Control of the AUX - VIDEO Page can also be accessed through the Page Menu.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-82 AUX - VIDEO Page Menu
Selecting video menu options:
INDEX
1) While viewing the AUX - VIDEO Page press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired video adjustment option and press the ENT Key.
Once the ENT key is pressed on any option, the page menu closes and returns to the AUX - VIDEO Page.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
483
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
VIDEO SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Video brightness, contrast, and saturation may be adjusted be selecting the setup function. While viewing
the setup function softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the AUX - VIDEO Page
softkeys.
Adjusting the video settings:
1) With the AUX-VIDEO Page displayed, press the SETUP Softkey.
2) Press the BRIGHT - or BRIGHT +, to adjust display brightness in five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
EIS
3) Press the CNTRST- or CNTRST +, to adjust display contrast in five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
4) Press the SAT - or SAT +, to adjust display saturationin five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If desired, return the display to the default settings by pressing the RESET Softkey.
6) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the previous softkey level.
DISPLAY SELECTION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey removes the map and displays video on the full screen. The softkey label
changes to grey with black characters. Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey again restores the map view and the
small video image. The softkey label returns to white characters on a black background.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Video
Display
APPENDICES
Map
View
INDEX
Figure 8-83 AUX - Video Split-Screen
484
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-84 Full Screen Video Display
ZOOM/RANGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the VID ZM + or VID ZM - Softkeys increases or decreases video display magnification between 1x
and 10x.
AFCS
The RANGE Knob can be used to increase or decrease the range setting on the map display or zoom in and
out on the video display. While in the Split-Screen mode, pressing the MAP ACTV or VID ACTV Softkey
determines which display the RANGE Knob adjusts. Pressing the softkey to display MAP ACTV allows the
RANGE Knob to control the range setting of the map display. Pressing the softkey to display VID ACTV allows
the RANGE Knob to control the zoom setting of the video display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
485
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.10 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVS TROUBLESHOOTING
SVS is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVS is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVS data, the PFD
display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVS becomes disabled without the following data resources:
EIS
• Attitude data
• Heading data
• GPS position data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• 9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• Terrain-SVS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
REVERSIONARY MODE
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVS will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVS PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
Figure 8-85 SVS Reversionary Mode
486
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-86 Unusual Attitude Display
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blue Band
AFCS
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-87 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
GDL 69/69A DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to
SiriusXM services
• Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
EIS
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the System Status Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the AUX Page Group).
INDEX
Figure 8-88 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
488
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
OFF AIR
---
Message Location
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Weather Datalink Page - center of page
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
CHECK ANTENNA
UPDATING
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
EIS
Acquiring channel audio or information
Channel not in service
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE Weather Datalink Page - center of page
within last five minutes
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
Weather Datalink Page - center of page SiriusXM subscription is not activated
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 8-5 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Error Messages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
489
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Blank Page
490
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
NOTE: The Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) supersedes information found in this document.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
EIS
• Annunciation Window: The Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is
based on alert levels described in the following section. The Annunciation Window is located to the right
of the Altimeter and Vertical Speed Indicator. All aircraft annunciations can be displayed simultaneously
in the Annunciation Window. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from
annunciations that are not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of
the window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Alerts Window: The Alerts Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages. Pressing
the ALERTS Softkey displays the Alerts Window. Pressing the ALERTS Softkey a second time removes the
Alerts Window from the display. When the Alerts Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can be used to scroll
through the alert message list.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the ALERTS Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation
to accompany an alert. The ALERTS Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (WARNING,
CAUTION, or ADVISORY). By selecting the softkey when flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged.
The softkey label then returns to ALERTS. If alerts are still present, the ALERTS label is displayed in white
with black text. Selecting the ALERTS Softkey a second time views the alert text messages.
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is supplied by
a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the G1000 System Annunciations Section for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Annunciation
Window
Alerts
Window
APPENDICES
Softkey
Annunciation
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
Figure A-1 G1000 Alerting System
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
• Audio Alerting System: The G1000 System issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met.
See the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information. The annunciation tone may be tested from the
AUX - System Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Select the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
Press to Test Annunciation Tone
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure A-2 Annunciation Tone Testing
(AUX-System Status Page)
492
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALERT LEVEL DEFINITIONS
The G1000 Alerting System uses three alert levels.
• WARNING: This level of alert requires immediate attention.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Warning alert text is shown in red in the Annunciation Window and is accompanied by a continuous chime
and a flashing ‘WARNING’ Softkey annunciation. Pressing the WARNING Softkey acknowledges the presence
of the warning alert and stops the aural chime.
• CAUTION: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
intervention.
EIS
Caution alert text is shown in yellow in the Annunciation Window and is accompanied by a single chime
and a flashing ‘CAUTION’ Softkey annunciation. Pressing the CAUTION Softkey acknowledges the presence
of the caution alert.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• ANNUNCIATION OR MESSAGE ADVISORY: This level of alert provides general information.
Annunciation alert text is shown in white in the Annunciation Window; no aural tone is generated. An
annunciation alert is accompanied by a flashing ADVISORY Softkey annunciation. Pressing the ADVISORY
Softkey acknowledges the presence of the annunciation alert.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message advisory alerts do not issue annunciations in the Annunciation Window. Instead, message advisory
alerts only issue a flashing ‘ADVISORY’ Softkey annunciation. Selecting the ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges
the presence of the message advisory alert and displays the alert text message in the Alerts Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure A-3 Softkey Annunciation
(ALERTS Softkey Labels)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
493
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
AIRCRAFT ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following alerts are configured specifically for the Diamond DA42-L360. Red annunciation window text
signifies warnings and yellow, cautions. See the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for recommended pilot actions.
Alerts Window Message
Autopilot automatic trim is inoperative.
Front, rear, or baggage door is not closed.
Audio Alert
No Tone
Left/right engine fuel pressure is greater than 35 psi.
Left/right engine fuel pressure is low.
Continuous Aural Tone
Left/right engine oil pressure is less than 25 psi.
Left/right engine starter is engaged.
Left/right engine alternator has failed.
Left/right auxiliary fuel tank is empty. (optional feature)
Landing gear is not down and locked.
De-icing fluid level is low. (optional feature)
De-icing pressure is high. (optional feature)
De-icing pressure is low. (optional feature)
Left/right engine main tank fuel quantity is low.
Single Aural Tone
Pitot heat has failed.
Pitot heat is off.
Stall warning heat has failed.
Stall warning heat is off.
Stick limiting system has failed.
Left/right bus voltage is less than 25 volts.
Left/right fuel transfer from aux to main in progress.
PFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the PFD is inoperative.
MFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the MFD is inoperative.
GIA FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the GIAs is inoperative.
No Tone
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Annunciation Window Text
AP TRIM FAIL
DOOR OPEN
L FUEL PR HI
R FUEL PR HI
L FUEL PR LO
R FUEL PR LO
L OIL PRES
R OIL PRES
L STARTER
R STARTER
L ALTN FAIL
R ALTN FAIL
L AUX FUEL E
R AUX FUEL E
CHECK GEAR
DEICE LVL LO
DEIC PRES HI
DEIC PRES LO
L FUEL LOW
R FUEL LOW
PITOT FAIL
PITOT HT OFF
STAL HT FAIL
STAL HT OFF
STICK LIMIT
L VOLTS LOW
R VOLTS LOW
L FUEL XFER
R FUEL XFER
N/A
N/A
N/A
494
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VOICE ALERTS
The audible alerts in the table below are announced by the system using either a male or female voice.
Alert Trigger
Issued when the aircraft transitions through the minimum descent altitude/decision height
(MDA/DH)
Aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent - issued only when vertical navigation is enabled
TIS voice alert - issued when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued
TIS voice alert - issued when the traffic system fails or cannot communicate
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued (TAS system)
Played when the TAS system passes a pilot-initiated self test.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Voice Alert
“Minimums, Minimums”
EIS
“Vertical Track”
“Traffic”
“Traffic Not Available”
“Traffic, Traffic”
“Traffic Advisory System
Test Passed”
Traffic Advisory System Test Played when the TAS system fails a pilot-initiated self test.
Failed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting the audio alert voice:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired voice, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
495
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as G1000 equipment begins to initialize. All windows
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
G1000 System should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with
the failed data (refer to Figure B-1 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer to the Aircraft Flight
Manual (AFM) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
EIS
GIA 63/63W
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GRS 77,
GMU 44 or
GIA 63/63W
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GEA 71,
GIA 63/63W,
or ECU
GDC 74A
GIA 63/63W
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GIA 63/63W
or DME/ADF
Source
GIA 63/63W
GDC 74A
GTX 33 or GIA 63/63W
AFCS
Figure A-4 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the AUX - System Status Page (Figure A-2). Active LRUs
are indicated by green check marks; failed, by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or
Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
Viewing LRU information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
APPENDICES
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
a) Select the LRU Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
496
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
Comment
System Annunciation
Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Different versions of GDU
software are installed in the
PFD and MFD. This can also
indicate different versions
of the navigation database
installed in the PFD and MFD.
In some circumstances, a
cross-talk error between the
PFD and MFD can cause this
annunciation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
This annunciation is seen only
when the autopilot is engaged.
The annunciation indicates an
AHRS monitor has detected
an abnormal flight parameter,
possibly caused by strong
turbulence. In this case, the
situation should correct itself
within a few seconds. If there
is an actual failure, a red “X”
soon appears over the Attitude
Indicator.
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
AHRS utilizes GPS inputs
during normal operation.
AHRS operation may be
degraded if GPS signals are not
present (see AFM).
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the air data
computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
A red ‘X’ through any other
display field (such as engine
instrumentation fields)
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Other Various Red X
Indications
AFCS
190-01061-02 Rev. B
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.
AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.
Display system is not receiving
valid true airspeed information
from air data computer.
Comment
Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from air data
computer.
Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.
Display system is not receiving
valid heading input from AHRS.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Annunciation
497
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
G1000 SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
NOTE: This section provides information regarding G1000 message advisories that may be displayed by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must
be considered when responding to a message.
This section describes various G1000 System message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU
or LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation as
shown previously in the G1000 System Annunciations section.
EIS
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY & MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message Advisory
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] is
stuck.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD1 [key name]
is stuck.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
498
Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming
the display. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing
it several times. The G1000 system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD voltage is low. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the
terrain card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists,
The G1000 system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, The G1000 system
should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the airport terrain database. Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, The G1000
system should be serviced.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The airport terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified
LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, The G1000
system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists,
The G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists,
The G1000 system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to reload
the navigation database. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
EIS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts
database error exists.
Comments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1
navigation database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport
terrain database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport
terrain database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATABASES
499
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
DATABASES (CONT.)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Airport
Directory database error exists.
Comments
The MFD detected a failure in the Airport Directory database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists,the system should be
serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 multiple
database errors exists.
PFD1 DB ERR multiple database
errors exists.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation
database mismatch. Xtalk is off.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in more than one database. If problem persists,
the system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The PFDs and MFD have different navigation database versions or types (Americas,
European, etc.) installed. Crossfill is off. Install correct navigation database version or
type in all displays.
DB MISMATCH – Standby
The PFDs and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or types
Navigation database mismatch.
(Americas, European, etc.) installed. Install correct standby navigation database version
or type in all displays.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions or types installed. Install
mismatch.
correct terrain database version or type in all displays.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database The PFD and MFD have different obstacle databases installed. Install correct obstacle
mismatch.
database in all displays.
DB MISMATCH – Airport Terrain
The PFD and MFD have different airport terrain databases installed. Install correct
database mismatch.
airport terrain database in both displays.
TERRAIN DSP – [PFD1 or
One of the terrain, airport terrain, or obstacle databases required for Terrain-SVS in the
MFD1] Terrain awareness display
specified PFD or MFD is missing or invalid.
unavailable.
GMA 1347 AUDIO PANEL
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Message Advisory
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is
inoperative.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 config
error. Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
Comments
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may still
be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The G1000 system should be serviced
when possible.
GEA 71 ENGINE/AIRFRAME UNIT
INDEX
Message Advisory
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GEA2 CONFIG – GEA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
500
Comments
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GEA2 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MANIFEST – GEA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
The #2 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Message Advisory
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GDC 74A AIR DATA COMPUTER
Comments
The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
GIA 63 INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the G1000 system
should be serviced.
AFCS
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
Loss of GPS integrity monitoring.
APPENDICES
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The
transmitter will operate at reduced power. If the problem persists, the G1000 system
should be serviced.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Comments
EIS
Message
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may
still be usable. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
501
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
GIA 63 (CONT.)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
RAIM UNAVAIL – RAIM is not
available from FAF to MAP waypoints.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
TRUE APR – True north approach.
Change HDG reference to TRUE.
GPS1 FAIL – GPS1 is inoperative.
GPS2 FAIL – GPS2 is inoperative.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
INDEX
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
502
Comments
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
GPS satellite coverage is insufficient to perform Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) from the FAF to the MAP waypoints.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav
angle is set to ‘AUTO’.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver is
unavailable. The G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
the G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The G1000
system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GIA 63W INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
EIS
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the G1000 system
should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.
AFCS
The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The
transmitter operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the G1000 system
should be serviced.
APPENDICES
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may
still be usable. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Comments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
503
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
GIA 63W (CONT.)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
Vertical guidance generated by SBAS is unavailable, use LNAV only minimums. (This
message will not be generated when SBAS is disabled.)
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav
angle is set to ‘MAGNETIC’.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
the G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The G1000
system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRUE APR – True north approach.
Change HDG reference to TRUE.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
Comments
504
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GTX 33 TRANSPONDER
Comments
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
There is no communication with the #1 transponder.
EIS
GRS 77 ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The G1000
GPS source.
system should be serviced when possible.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
any GPS information.
limitations. The G1000 system should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The G1000 system should be
backup GPS information.
serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The G1000 system should be
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
serviced.
AHRS MAG DB – AHRS magnetic
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
model database version mismatch.
when practical.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
model needs update.
when practical.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/ The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
South, no magnetic compass.
flagged as invalid.
MANIFEST – GRS1 software
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message Advisory
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GDL 69/69A SATELLITE DATALINK RECEIVER
Comments
GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The G1000
system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
Message Advisory
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
MANIFEST – GDL software mismatch,
The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
communication halted.
505
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
MISCELLANEOUS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Message Advisory
Comments
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the G1000 system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is
is locked.
locked. This occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete
waypoint. The flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message.
This can also occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
OR
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
waypoint moved.
navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
Verify user modified procedures.
edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
Verify stored airways.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
truncated.
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked flight plan.
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
-[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
than 10 minutes.
10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
than 2 nm.
APR INACTV – Approach is not active. The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate
approach when required.
506
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MISCELLANEOUS (CONT.)
Bad parallel track geometry.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
EIS
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable: bad
geometry.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable: invalid
leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable: past
IAF.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current
vertical waypoint.
Comments
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the
appropriate NAV receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the
CDI to the correct NAV receiver.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate frequency
for approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for approach.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight
path angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions
to the next vertical waypoint.
VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported leg type in The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported
flight plan.
leg type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance
to the active vertical waypoint.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive crosstrack
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go
error.
invalid.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track angle
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation
error.
to go invalid.
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course selected. A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
NON WGS84 WPT – Do not use GPS
The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the
WGS84 map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do
navigation to [xxxx].
not use GPS to navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has failed.
The G1000 is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic
device should be serviced.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has failed.
Stormscope has failed. The G1000 System should be serviced.
FAILED PATH – A data path has failed.
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63/63W has failed.
MAG VAR WARN – Large magnetic variance. The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
Verify all course angles.
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course
angles may differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>.
Message criteria entered by the user.
SVS – SVS DISABLED: Out of available terrain Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of
region.
the installed terrain database.
SVS – SVS DISABLED: Terrain DB resolution
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution
too low.
(9 arc-second or better) is not currently installed.
CHECK CRS – Database course for LOC1/
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by more than
[LOCID] is [CRS]°
10 degrees.
CHECK CRS – Database course for LOC2/
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than
[LOCID] is [CRS]°
10 degrees.
507
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
MISCELLANEOUS (CONT.)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 REM – Card 1 was removed.
Reinsert card.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 REM – Card 2 was removed.
Reinsert card.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 ERR – Card 1 is invalid.
EIS
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 ERR –Card 2 is invalid.
TRN AUD FAIL – Trn Awareness audio source unavailable
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TERRAIN AUD CFG – Trn Awareness audio config error.
Service req’d
Comments
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the
specified PFD or MFD. The SD card needs to be reinserted.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the
specified PFD or MFD. The SD card needs to be reinserted.
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD
contains invalid data.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or
MFD contains invalid data..
The audio source for terrain awareness is offline. Check GIA1
or GIA2
Terrain audio alerts are not configured properly. The system
should be serviced.
508
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS (GFC 700)
The following annunciations (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD above the Airspeed
and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by criticality.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AFCS Status Annunciation
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure A-6 AFCS Status Annunciation
Alert Condition
Rudder Mistrim Left
Aileron Mistrim Right
Elevator Mistrim Down
Elevator Mistrim Up
(or Stuck AP TRIM
Switch)
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move AP TRIM switches separately to unstick
YD control failure
Roll Failure
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
Preflight Test
AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be available
APPENDICES
System Failure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yaw Damper Failure
Roll servo providing sustained force in indicated direction
AFCS
Pitch Trim Failure
Yaw servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aileron Mistrim Left
Description
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Rudder Mistrim Right
Annunciation
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight
system tests. Doing so may cause the preflight system test to fail or never
to start. Cycle power to the servos if this occurs.
INDEX
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
509
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
SVS TERRAIN ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD. For more information
on SVS Terrain, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
PFD/MFD TERRAIN-SVS
Page Annunciation
Alert Type
Pop-Up Alert
(MFD Navigation Map
Page)
Aural Message
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
“Warning; Obstacle,
Obstacle”
“Warning; Obstacle,
Obstacle”
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
“Caution; Obstacle,
Obstacle”
“Caution; Obstacle,
Obstacle”
SVS TERRAIN STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
PFD/MFD
TERRAIN-SVS Page Annunciation
AFCS
Alert Type
Aural Message
System Test Fail
“Terrain System Failure”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain Alerting is disabled
None
No GPS position or excessively degraded
GPS signal
“Terrain System Not Available”
System Test in progress
APPENDICES
System Test pass
GPS signal is re-established
None
None
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
“Terrain System Available”
TERRAIN AWARENESS AND WARNING SYSTEM (TAWS) ALERTS
INDEX
Annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD. For more information
on TAWS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
510
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
* “Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”*
*
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
*
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
*
AFCS
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
*
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
* “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
*
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
EIS
or
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*
or
APPENDICES
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
Voice Alert
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Voice Callout
(VCO) “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Alert Type
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on MFD pages with terrain display enabled.
511
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
TAWS SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
PFD/MFD* Alert TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
System Test in progress
System Test pass
None
EIS
TAWS-B PDA and FLTA Alerting
Inhibited
No GPS position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or aircraft is outside of terrain
database coverage area
TAWS-B System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS operating with PFD Terrain
or Obstacle databases
None
Voice Alert
TAWS TEST
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
None
“TAWS Not Available”
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
AFCS
† Annunciation is shown on TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “TAWS Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PFD Alert Annunciation
Figure A-7 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
512
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
MFD Pop-up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations,
SD cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen navigation and ChartView database updates. Not
all SD cards are compatible with the G1000. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or the aircraft manufacturer.
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
power-up screen and the effective date on the AUX-System Status Page being displayed in yellow.
EIS
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select “Aviation Data Error Report.
JEPPESEN DATABASES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Jeppesen navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The ChartView database is updated on a
14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will
no longer function. Both of these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen.
NOTE: The Jeppesen aviation navigation database is now referred to as the ‘navigation database’. Previously
this database had been referred to as the ‘aviation database’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The ChartView database should be copied to the Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside
in the bottom card slot on the MFD. The navigation database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user
supplied SD data card. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update information.
NOTE: After the navigation database is installed, the card may be removed.
AFCS
Updating the Jeppesen navigation database:
1) Copy the new navigation database to an SD card obtained from Garmin, or the aircraft manufacturer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) With the G1000 system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top
card slot of the MFD (label of SD card facing left).
3) Turn the G1000 system ON. A prompt similar to the following illustration is displayed:
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure B-1 Navigation Database Load Prompt
4) Press the YES Softkey to update the navigation database in the MFD.
5) After the update completes, press any key. The display starts in normal mode.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
513
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure B-2 Database Update Confirmation
6) Turn the G1000 system OFF and remove the SD card from the top card slot.
7) Repeat steps 2 through 6 for PFD1.
8) Apply power to the system and press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
10) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show navigation database information for each display (MFD1
DB, PFD1 DB).
APPENDICES
Figure B-3 Check Database Cycle Number (MFD shown)
GARMIN DATABASES
INDEX
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
514
• Expanded basemap
• Airport terrain
• SafeTaxi
• Terrain
• Obstacle
• FliteCharts
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
• Airport Directory
(AOPA)
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded and ultimately
stored on three Supplemental Data Cards (with the exception of FliteCharts, which is loaded on only one card).
Each Supplemental Data Card resides in the bottom card of each display as shown in Figure B-4. These cards
must not be removed except to update the databases stored on each card.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD
MFD
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure B-4 Correct Database Locations
Since these databases are not stored internally in the displays, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical
database versions must be kept in each display unit.
AFCS
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. The airport terrain database contains increased
resolution terrain data around airports. These databases are updated periodically and have no expiration date.
APPENDICES
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
The AOPA Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S., and offers detailed
information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. This
database is updated four times per year.
515
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
AUTOMATIC DATABASE SYNCHRONIZATION FEATURE
EIS
The automatic database synchronization feature automatically transfers the database from a single
SD database card to the SD cards on the PFD and the MFD to ensure that all databases are synchronized
throughout the system. After power-up, the system compares all copies of each applicable database. If similar
databases do not match, the most recent valid database is automatically copied to each card in the system that
does not already contain that database.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following databases are checked and synchronized: Basemap, Safetaxi, Airport Terrain, Obstacle,
Airport Directory (AOPA), and Terrain. This feature applies only to databases that are stored on the SD card
that resides in the bottom slot of each display. This feature does not apply to the navigation database which
is stored internally in each display, or to the charts databases (FliteCharts and ChartView) which are only
required to be present on the MFD. The typical procedure would be to download new databases to the MFD
card, then synchronize the data to the PFD.
NOTE: The 9-arc second terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this method.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Therefore the user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the system to a ground power
source while performing the database synchronization.
AFCS
The synchronization progress may be monitored on the AUX-System Status Page in the Sync Status section
of the Database Window (Figure B-5). This section shows the synchronization status of each applicable
database, including the percent complete, time remaining, and to which displays the databases are being
copied. When the synchronization is complete, the status is listed as ‘Complete’, followed by the displays to
which the databases were copied. This sub-section is only present when a sync is occurring or has occurred
on the current power-up.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
An indication of ‘Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized databases will be used by
the system.
Figure B-5 AUX-System Status Page, Database Window
516
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Display Database Softkey (Figure B-7) is used to place the cursor in the Database Window. Upon
first press of the Display Database Softkey, the softkey will change to a selected state (black text on gray
background) and the cursor will appear in the Database Window. At this point the user can scroll through
all databases in the Database Window to view status information. If the Display Database Softkey is pressed
repeatedly, the softkey will switch between PFD1 and MFD1. Database status information in the Database
Window will reflect the database of the selected PFD or MFD. After a successful sync and restart, verify that
the proper databases are now in use on the AUX–System Status Page (Figure B-5).
EIS
If an error occurs during the synchronization, an error message will be displayed, followed by the affected
display in the Sync Status section of the Database Window (Figure B-6). If a synchronization completes on
one display, but an error occurs on another, the error message will be displayed with the affected diaplay
listed after it. When an error message (Table B-1) is displayed, the problem must be corrected before the
synchronization can be completed. A power cycle is required to restart synchronization when ‘Card Full’ or
‘Err’ is shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Database
Synchronization
Error Message
Figure B-6 Synchronization Error Message
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Description
An active synchronization has been canceled using the SYNC DBS Softkey
SD card does not contain sufficient memory
Displayed for all other errors that may cause the synchronization process to be halted
System timed-out prior to the database transfer completing
AFCS
Error Message
Canceled
Card Full
Err
Timeout
Table B-1 Database Synchronization Error Messages
APPENDICES
Enabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SYNC DBS Softkey (Figure B-7) on the AUX–System Status Page allows the flight crew control over
the automatic database synchronization feature. When database synchronization is enabled, the SYNC DBS
Softkey is displayed as black text on gray background and a confirmation window (Figure B-8) is displayed.
When database synchronization is disabled, the softkey is displayed as white text on black background. If the
SYNC DBS Softkey is pressed while a database synchronization is in progress, the current synchronization
process will be canceled.
Disabled
Figure B-7 SYNC DBS Softkey
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
517
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
EIS
Figure B-8 Enable Database Synchronization Prompt
UPDATING GARMIN DATABASES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Navigation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new
databases onto an existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (running Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Cards (010-00330-42, or -43) from the PFD and MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
After the data has been copied to the appropriate data card, perform the following steps:
1) With system power OFF, remove the MFD database card from the bottom card slot of the MFD.
AFCS
2) Update the Garmin databases on the MFD card.
3) Insert the MFD database card into the bottom card slot of the MFD.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen
(Figure B-9). When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, a ‘Verifying’ message may be seen. If this
message is present, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to step 5.
518
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure B-9 Database Information on the Power-up Screen
5) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
8) Make sure the SYNC DBS Softkey is in the enabled state (Figure B-7).
9) Monitor the Sync Status in the Database Window. Wait for all databases to complete synching, indicated by
‘Complete’ being displayed as seen in Figure B-6.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
10) Remove and reapply power to the system.
11) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
12) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
Unselected
AFCS
13) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1 DB, PFD1
DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.
MFD1 DB Selected PFD1 DB Selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure B-10 Display Database Softkey
Cancel automatic database synchronization:
APPENDICES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
3) Press the SYNC DBS Softkey (if needed) to disable (Figure B-7) automatic database synchronization.
4) Acknowledge the cancellation by pressing the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
519
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
Blank Page
520
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX C
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GLOSSARY
Course to Steer
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
APPENDICES
CRS
CRS
CRSR
CTA
CTRL
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CR
CRG
CRNT
Crosstrack Error
AFCS
190-01061-02 Rev. B
barometric altitude
barometric setting
battery
backcourse
CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
Course
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CHT
CHKLIST
CHNL
CI
CLD
CLR
cm
CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ATK
AUTOSEQ
AUX
AWOS
BFO
BKSP
BRG
C
ºC
CA
CALC
Calibrated Airspeed
The compass direction from the
present position to a destination
waypoint
beat frequency oscillator
backspace
bearing
center runway
degrees Celsius
Course to Altitude
calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Course to DME distance
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix
Cylinder Head Temperature
checklist
channel
Course to Intercept
cloud
clear
centimeter
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
carbon monoxide
communication radio
configuration
coolant
co-pilot
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or
stay on course. Provides the most
efficient heading to get back to the
desired course and proceed along
the flight plan
Course to Radial
Cockpit Reference Guide
current
The distance the aircraft is off a
desired course in either direction, left
or right
course
Course to Steer
cursor
Control Area
control
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
Bearing
EIS
AIM
AIRMET
ALRT
ALT
ALT, ALTN
AMPS
ANNUNC
ANT
AP
AP DISC
APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
accuracy
active, activate
air data computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Arc to fix
Automatic Flight Control System
Airplane Flight Manual
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
airframe
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference
System
Airman’s Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
alert
altitude
alternator
amperes
annunciation
antenna
autopilot
autopilot disconnect
approach
airport, aerodrome
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
arrival
airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated Surface Observing
System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information
Service
along-track
automatic sequence
auxiliary
Automated Weather Observing
System
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ACC
ACT, ACTV
ADC
ADF
ADI
AF
AFCS
AFM
AFMS
AFRM
AGL
AHRS
521
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cumulative
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
Cockpit Voice Recorder
coverage
control wheel steering
cylinder
density altitude
database
decibels ‘Z’ (radar return)
declutter
decrease fuel
degree
de-icing
departure
The desired course between the
active “from” and “to” waypoints
DEST
destination
DF
Direct to Fix
DFLT
default
DGRD
degrade
DH
decision height
Dilution of Precision A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry,
where higher numbers equal poorer
geometry)
DIR
direction
DIS
distance
Distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint
DME
Distance Measuring Equipment
DOP
Dilution of Precision
DP
Departure Procedure
DPRT
departure
DR
dead reckoning
DSBL
disabled
DTK
Desired Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
D ALT
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCLTR, DECLTR
DEC FUEL
deg
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Desired Track
APPENDICES
E
ECU
Efficiency
INDEX
EGT
EIS
ELEV
ELEV
EMERGCY
EMI
ENDUR
522
empty, east
Engine Control Unit
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Engine Indication System
elevation
elevator
emergency
Electromagnetic Interference
endurance
Endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible
flight time based on available fuel on
board
ENG
engine
ENGD
engaged
ENR
enroute
Enroute Safe Altitude The recommended minimum altitude
within ten miles left or right of the
desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to
ENT
enter
EPE
Estimated Position Error
EPU
Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR
error
ESA
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Position Error A measure of horizontal GPS
position error derived by satellite
geometry conditions and other
factors
Estimated Time of Arrival The estimated time at which the
aircraft should reach the destination
waypoint, based upon current speed
and track
Estimated Time Enroute The estimated time it takes to
reach the destination waypoint from
the present position, based upon
current ground speed
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
Estimated Time Enroute
EXPIRD
expired
ºF
FA
FAA
FADEC
FAF
FAIL
FC
FCC
FCST
FD
FD
FDE
FFLOW
FIS-B
FISDL
FL
FLC
FM
degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude
Federal Aviation Administration
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
Final Approach Fix
failure
Course From Fix to Distance
Federal Communication Commission
forecast
Course From Fix to DME Distance
flight director
Fault Detection and Exclusion
fuel flow
Flight Information ServicesBroadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
flight level
Flight Level Change
Course From Fix to Manual
Termination
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX C
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
key stuck
kilogram
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
AFCS
KEYSTK
kg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Hold Terminating at Altitude
heading
Groundspeed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HA
HDG
GMA
GMT
GMU
GND
gph
GPS
Grid MORA
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GTX
glideslope
go-around
gallon(s)
gearbox
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
ground
gallons per hour
Global Positioning System
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude;
one degree latitude by one degree
longitude in size and clears the
highest elevation reference point in
the grid by 1000 feet for all areas of
the grid
The velocity that the aircraft is
travelling relative to a ground
position
see Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground speed
Garmin Transponder
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a
magnetic compass or a properly set
directional gyro
HF
Hold Terminating at Fix
HFOM
Horizontal Figure of Merit
Hg
mercury
HI
high
HI SENS
High Sensitivity
HM
Hold with Manual Termination
Horizontal Figure of Merit A measure of the uncertainty in
the aircraft’s horizontal position
hPa
hectopascal
HPL
Horizontal Protection Level
hr
hour
HSDB
High-Speed Data Bus
HSI
Horizontal Situation Indicator
HT
heat
HUL
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hz
Hertz
I
Inner Marker
IAF
Initial Approach Fix
IAT
Indicated Air Temperature
IAU
Integrated Avionics Unit
ICAO
International Civil Aviation
Organization
ICS
Intercom System
ID
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
IDENT, IDNT
identification
IF
Initial Fix
IFR
Instrument Flight Rules
IG
Imperial gallon
ILS
Instrument Landing System
IMC
Instrument
Meteorological
Conditions
in
inch
INACTV
inactive
INC FUEL
increase fuel
IND
indicated
Indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation
on the aircraft panel
INFO
information
in HG
inches of mercury
INT
intersection(s)
INTEG
integrity (RAIM unavailable)
IrDA, IRDA
Infrared Data Association
EIS
G/S, GS
GA
gal, gl
GBOX
GDC
GDL
GDU
GEA
GEO
GFC
GIA
GLS
Heading
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Fuel On Board
Flight Management System
Fuel On Board
flight plan
feet per minute
frequency
freezing
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units
of fuel per hour
The total amount of usable fuel on
board the aircraft
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FMS
FOB
FPL
fpm
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
Fuel Flow
523
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
kHz
km
kt
kilohertz
kilometer
knot
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
L
left, left runway
LAT
latitude
LBL
label
lb
pound
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LCL
local
LED
Light Emitting Diode
Left Over Fuel On Board The amount of fuel remaining
on board after the completion of
one or more legs of a flight plan or
direct-to
Left Over Fuel Reserve The amount of flight time remaining,
based on the amount of fuel on
board after the completion of one or
more legs of a flight plan or directto, and a known consumption rate
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between
two waypoints
LIFR
Low Instrument Flight Rules
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
LO
low
LOC
localizer
LOI
loss of integrity (GPS)
LON
longitude
LPV
Localizer Performance with Vertical
guidance
LRU
Line Replacement Unit
LT
left
LTNG
lightning
LVL
level
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
M
m
MAG
MAG VAR
MAHP
MAN IN
MAN SQ
MAP
MASQ
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
INDEX
MET
METAR
524
Middle Marker
meter
Magnetic
Magnetic Variation
Missed Approach Hold Point
manifold pressure (inches Hg)
Manual Squelch
Missed Approach Point
Master Avionics Squelch
maximum
maximum speed (overspeed)
barometric
minimum
descent
altitude
manual electric trim
Meteorological Aviation Routine
MEPT
manual electric pitch trim
MFD
Multi Function Display
MGRS
Military Grid Reference System
MHz
megahertz
MIC
microphone
MIN
minimum
Minimum Safe Altitude
Uses Grid MORAs to determine
a safe altitude within ten miles of
the aircraft present position
MKR
marker beacon
MOA
Military Operations Area
MOV
movement
mpm
meters per minute
MSA
Minimum Safe Altitude
MSG
message
MSL
Mean Sea Level
MT
meter
mV
millivolt(s)
MVFR
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
N
NAV
NAVAID
NDB
NEXRAD
nm
NPT
NRST
north
navigation
NAVigation AID
Non-directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
nautical mile(s)
nearest
O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OXY
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
offset
oxygen
P ALT
PA
PA
PASS
PC
PFD
PI
PIT, PTCH
POSN
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
psi
PT
pressure altitude
Passenger Address
Proximity Advisory
passenger(s)
personal computer
Primary Flight Display
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept
pitch
position
parts per million
Present Position
pressure
procedure(s), procedure turn
pounds per square inch
Procedure Turn
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX C
RAM
REF
REM
REQ
RES
REV
RF
RMI
RMT
RNG
RNWY
ROL
ROM
rpm
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RVRSNRY
RX
SID
SIGMET
190-01061-02 Rev. B
TRG
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
Sim
SLP/SKD
Track Angle Error
APPENDICES
SD
sec
SEL, SLCT
SFC
SIAP
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
T HDG
TIS
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
Topo
Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SCIT
south
Selective Availability
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based
Augmentation
System
Storm Cell Identification and
Tracking
Secure Digital
second(s)
select
surface
Standard Instrument Approach
Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant Meteorological
Information
simulator
slip/skid
true
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed
Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning
System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
telephone
temperature
terminal
Track Between Two Fixes
Temporary Flight Restriction
True Heading
Traffic Information System
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
topographic
Direction of aircraft movement
relative to a ground position; also
‘Ground Track’
The angle difference between the
desired track and the current track
target
track
Terminal Radar Service Area
truncated
AFCS
S
SA
SAT
SBAS
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAS
TAT
TAWS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
right, right runway
radial
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
random access memory
reference
remaining (fuel remaining)
required
reserve (fuel reserve entered by
pilot)
reverse, revision, revise
Constant Radius Turn to Fix
Radio Magnetic Indicator
remote
range
runway
roll
read only memory
revolutions per minute
reset fuel
reserve (fuel reserve entered by
pilot)
right
reversionary
receive
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
R
RAD
RAIM
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
quantity
symbol
speed
Special Position Identification
speaker
squelch
service
stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
statistics
standby
standard
Stormscope
Special Use Airspace
suspend
Synthetic Vision System
software
system
EIS
QTY
SMBL
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
SRVC, SVC
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
STRMSCP
SUA
SUSP
SVS
SW
SYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
parallel track
Push-to-Talk
power
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PTK
PTT
PWR
525
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
TTL
TURN
TX
total
procedure turn
transmit
UNAVAIL
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
unavailable
user
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/
Universal Polar Stereographic Grid
VPL
VPROF
VPTH
VR
VS
VSI
VSR
VTF
Heading Vector to Manual
Termination
Visual Meteorological Conditions
vertical navigation
volume
VHF Omni-directional Range
very high frequency omnidirectional
range station and tactical air
navigation
Vertical Protection Level
VNV profile, vertical profile
VNV path, vertical path
Heading Vector to Radial
vertical speed
Vertical Speed Indicator
Vertical Speed Required
vector to final
W
WAAS
WARN
WGS-84
WPT
WW
WX
watt(s), west
Wide Area Augmentation System
warning (GPS position error)
World Geodetic System - 1984
waypoint(s)
world wide
weather
XFER, XFR
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
transfer
transponder
cross-talk
cross-track
VMC
VNAV, VNV
VOL
VOR
VORTAC
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
V, Vspeed
velocity (airspeed)
VA
Heading Vector to Altitude
VAPP
VOR approach
VAR
variation
VD
Heading Vector to DME Distance
Vdc
volts, direct current
VERT
vertical
Vertical Figure of Merit
A measure of the uncertainty in
the aircraft’s vertical position
Vertical Speed Required The vertical speed necessary
to descend/climb from a current
position and altitude to a defined
target position and altitude, based
upon current groundspeed
VFOM
Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR
Visual Flight Rules
VHF
Very High Frequency
VI
Heading Vector to Intercept
VLOC
VOR/Localizer Receiver
VM
526
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a particular aspect of G1000 operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in
the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized
dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
What is SBAS?
EIS
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the middle east and northern Africa. The
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan and parts of northern Australia.
How does SBAS affect approach operations?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
AFCS
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV approaches
are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach combines the LNAV/
VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV
approaches allow lower approach minimums.
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
APPENDICES
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
527
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
G1000 System monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A).
Without RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF,
the pilot must fly the missed approach procedure.
Why are there not any approaches available for a flight plan?
EIS
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the G1000 indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original en route portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
G1000 System automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should
an approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
AFCS
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the G1000?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The G1000 System meets the requirements of TSO-C145a Class 3 and
ETSO C145 Class 3 installations. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See the
approved Airplane Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM)
for more information.
What does the OBS Softkey do?
INDEX
APPENDICES
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the G1000 automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
528
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX D
• Manual course change on HSI not possible
• Manually select course to waypoint from
HSI
• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
• Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
• Must be in this mode for final approach
course
• Cannot be set for final approach course or
published holding patterns
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
OBS
• Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected
waypoint
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Normal (OBS not activated)
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints
EIS
When OBS mode is active, the G1000 allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The G1000 suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the G1000 from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Selecting
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Why does the G1000 not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000 only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no “OBS” or
‘SUSP’ annunciation). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the “bisector” of the turn
being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs at an
equal angle from each leg.
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?
AFCS
The G1000 allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and selecting the ACT LEG Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS
then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When does turn anticipation begin?
The G1000 smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
APPENDICES
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
INDEX
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
529
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
When does the CDI scale change?
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Once a departure is activated, the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3 nm. The
CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm from the
departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm back
to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When a missed approach is
activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To comply with TSO specifications, the G1000 does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT LEG Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
AFCS
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The G1000 directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The G1000 provides navigation
along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
APPENDICES
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘SELECT APPROACH’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the
desired transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.
INDEX
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
530
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX E
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GENERAL TIS INFORMATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to TIS.
NOTE: TIS is not intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot of the
responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. TIS should not be used for avoidance maneuvers during
instrument meteorological conditions (IMC) or when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft.
EIS
The Traffic Information Service (TIS) provides traffic advisory information to non-TAS/TCAS-equipped aircraft.
TIS is a ground-based service providing the relative locations of all ATCRBS Mode-A and Mode-C transponder
equipped aircraft within a specified service volume. The TIS ground sensor uses real-time track reports to generate
traffic notification. The G1000 System displays TIS traffic information on the Traffic Map Page of the MFD. TIS
information may also be displayed for overlay on the MFD Navigation Map Page, as well as on the PFD Inset
Map. Surveillance data includes all transponder-equipped aircraft within the coverage volume. The G1000
System displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3,000 feet below, to 3,500 feet above the
requesting aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The main difference between the Traffic Information System (TIS) and Traffic Advisory (TAS) or Traffic Collision
Avoidance Systems (TCAS) is the source of surveillance data. TAS/TCAS uses an airborne interrogator with a halfsecond update rate, while TIS utilizes the terminal Mode-S ground interrogator and accompanying data link to
provide a five-second update rate. TIS and TAS/TCAS have similar ranges.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode-S radar system, which is a “secondary surveillance” radar system similar
to that used by ATCRBS. Many limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. Information provided by
TIS is neither better nor more accurate than the information used by ATC. TIS is intended only to assist in visual
acquisition of other aircraft in visual meteorological conditions (VMC). While TIS is a useful aid for visual traffic
avoidance, system limitations must be considered to ensure proper use. No recommended avoidance maneuvers
are given, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory.
AFCS
• TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• TIS is dependent on two-way, line-of-sight communications between the aircraft and the Mode-S radar antenna.
Whenever the structure of the aircraft comes between the transponder antenna and the ground-based radar
antenna, the signal may be temporarily interrupted.
NOTE: Refer to the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for a more
comprehensive explanation of limitations and anomalies associated with TIS.
APPENDICES
NOTE: TIS is unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the United States. This is often the case in
mountainous regions.
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
531
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX E
WARNING: Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage. Operation of the ground stations
is the responsibility of the FAA. Refer to the AIM for a Terminal Mode S radar site map.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TIS information is collected during a single radar sweep. Collected information is then sent through the Mode
S uplink on the next radar sweep. Because of this, the surveillance information is approximately five seconds old.
TIS ground station tracking software uses prediction algorithms to compensate for this delay. These algorithms
use track history data to calculate expected intruder positions consistent with the time of display. Occasionally,
aircraft maneuvering may cause variations in this calculation and create slight errors on the Traffic Map Page which
affect relative bearing information and the target track vector and may delay display of the intruder information.
However, intruder distance and altitude typically remain relatively accurate and may be used to assist in spotting
traffic. The following errors are common examples:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When the client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the tracking algorithm may report
incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that intercepts the client aircraft course at a shallow angle
(either overtaking or head-on) and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 0.25 nm, TIS may display the
intruder aircraft on the incorrect side of the client aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
These are rare occurrences and are typically resolved within a few radar sweeps once the client/intruder aircraft
course stabilizes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilots using TIS can provide valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions by reporting observations
of undesirable performance. Reports should identify the time of observation, location, type and identity of the
aircraft, and describe the condition observed. Reports should also include the type of transponder and transponder
software version. Since TIS performance is monitored by maintenance personnel, not ATC, malfunctions should
be reported in the following ways:
• By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) facility
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• By FAA Form 8000-7, Safety Improvement Report (postage-paid card can be obtained at FAA FSSs, General
Aviation District Offices, Flight Standards District Offices, and General Aviation Fixed Base Operators)
532
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX F
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP SYMBOLS
AIRPORTS
BASEMAP
Item
Symbol
Unknown Airport
Interstate Highway
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
State Highway
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Item
Symbol
EIS
US Highway
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
National Highway
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
City
Towered, Serviced Airport
State/Province Border
Restricted (Private) Airport
Heliport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
International Border
Road
Railroad
NAVAIDS
Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Item
Latitude/Longitude
Intersection
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
AIRSPACE BOUNDARIES
Mode C Tower Area
VOR/ILS
VORTAC
Warning Area Prohibited Area
Alert Area
Restricted Area
Caution Area Training Area
Danger Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
APPENDICES
TACAN
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VOR/DME
Symbol
AFCS
VOR
Item
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace
NDB (non-directional radio beacon)
Military Operations Area (MOA)
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
533
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX F
HAZARD AVOIDANCE FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Feature
Symbol
Item
Terrain Proximity/TAWS display enabled
Non-threat Traffic
Traffic display enabled
Proximity Advisory
NEXRAD display enabled
Traffic Advisory, Out of Range
Cloud Top display enabled
EIS
TRAFFIC
Symbol
Traffic Advisory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Echo Top display enabled
MISCELLANEOUS
XM Lightning display enabled
Item
Cell Movement display enabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SIGMETs/AIRMETs display enabled
METARs display enabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Surface Analysis display enabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Freezing Levels display enabled
APPENDICES
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
Map Pointer (when panning)
Elevation Pointer
(on Topography Scale when panning)
City Forecast display enabled
Measuring Pointer
Wind Vector
Winds Aloft display enabled
Overzoom Indicator
County Warnings display enabled
User Waypoint
Cyclone Warnings display enabled
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Loss of hazard avoidance feature
(loss of GPS position)
Parallel Track Waypoint
Turbulence
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Icing Potential
PIREPs
Symbol
Top of Descent (TOD)
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
INDEX
AIREPs
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
534
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
APPENDIX F
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERRAIN AND OBSTACLE COLORS AND SYMBOLS
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
EIS
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure F-1 Terrain Proximity Color Chart
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure F-2 TAWS Potential Impact Points
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
AFCS
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft
below aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table F-1 Obstacle Colors
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
535
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX F
Blank Page
536
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
B
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Backlighting-------------------------------------------------- 42
Barometric altimeter setting---------------------------44, 50
Bearing/distance, measuring------------------------------141
Bearing information-------------------------------------45, 57
Bearing pointer----------------------------------------------- 56
Bearing source----------------------------------------------- 57
Bus voltage--------------------------------------------------- 83
APPENDICES
C
Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------238
CDI------------------------------58, 233, 245, 256, 264, 271
Cell Movement----------------------------------------------292
Chart Not Available---------------------------------- 435, 455
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
EIS
Activate a Flight Plan---------------------------------------207
Active channel-----------------------------------------------476
Active frequency--------------------------------------- 92, 101
ADF---------------------------------------------------------110
ADF
ADF mode------------------------------------------ 110, 112
ANT mode-------------------------------------------------112
Volume-----------------------------------------------------110
ADF audio----------------------------------------------------102
ADF/BFO-----------------------------------------------------112
ADF/DME tuning--------------------------------------------113
ADF frequency tuning--------------------------------------111
ADF volume--------------------------------------------------112
ADS-B---------------------------------------------------------364
AHRS--------------------------------------------------- 505, 506
Aircraft range------------------------------------------------- 84
Air Data Computer (ADC)------------------------------------ 3
AIREP---------------------------------------------------------306
Airport
Information-----------------------------------------------166
Airspace Alerts--------------------------------- 181, 182, 273
Airspeed indicator---------------------------------------44, 46
Airspeed Reference-----------------------------------------378
Airways
Collapsed--------------------------------------------------220
Expanded--------------------------------------------------220
Alerting system----------------------------------------------491
Alert levels---------------------------------------------------493
Alerts---------------------------------------------------------491
Aircraft-----------------------------------------------------494
Audio voice-----------------------------------------------495
Alerts window--------------------------------------------45, 69
Along Track Offset----------------------------------- 211, 212
ALT------------------------------------------------------------269
Altimeter--------------------------------------------------44, 49
Altitude
Constraints----------------------------------------- 223, 256
Altitude alerting---------------------------------------------- 71
Altitude capture-------------------------------------- 375, 383
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)----------------------------------376
Altitude Reference----------------------------- 375, 376, 383
Ammeter------------------------------------------------------ 83
Annunciations
AFCS Status-----------------------------------------------509
G1000 System-------------------------------- 10, 496–497
TAWS Status----------------------------------------------512
Test tone---------------------------------------------- 12, 492
Annunciation window--------------------------------------- 45
Annunciator lights------------------------------------------121
ANT/BFO-----------------------------------------------------112
AOPA Airport Directory----- 413, 515, 471, 472, 473, 473
Approach-----------------------------------------------------528
Activating-------------------------------------------------236
ILS----------------------------------------------------------405
Loading--------------------------------------- 204, 233, 235
Missed-----------------------------------------------------408
Removing--------------------------------------------------236
Approach box-----------------------------------------------457
Approach Mode, AFCS------------------------ 393, 405, 406
APR softkey------------------------------------------- 235, 241
Arrival procedure------189, 202, 230, 232, 254, 256, 265
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)----- 3, 8,
13–14
Attitude indicator----------------------------------------44, 48
Audio alerting system--------------------------------------492
Audio Panel------------------------------------------------ 2, 10
Audio Panel fail-safe operation---------------------------127
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)------ 1, 367–412
Controls-------------------------------------------- 368–369
Example procedures------------------------------ 398–405
Status Annunciations------------------------------------410
Status Bar-------------------------------------------------396
Status Box-------------------------------------------------371
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------100
Autopilot----------------------------------------367, 395–396
Disconnect----------------------------------- 369, 387, 397
Auto-tuning--------------------------------------------------108
Auto-tuning, COM------------------------------------------- 95
Auto-tuning, NAV-------------------------------------------104
Auto Zoom---------------------------------------------------134
Auxiliary Pages (AUX)--------------------------------------- 31
AUX - system status page-432, 433, 452, 453, 468, 469,
470, 473
Aviation Symbols------------------------------- 146, 188, 189
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Index
I-1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
Chart options----------------------------------------- 443, 462
Chart setup box-------------------------------------- 449, 466
ChartView--------------------------------------- 413, 434, 452
ChartView database----------------------------------------452
ChartView functions----------------------------------------434
ChartView plan view---------------------------------------444
ChartView profile view-------------------------------------445
ChartView softkeys-----------------------------------------434
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------220
Cloud Tops---------------------------------------------------290
COM channel spacing--------------------------------------- 99
COM frequency box-------------------------------------89, 92
Command Bars, flight director----------------------------372
Communication (COM) frequency box------------------- 44
COM tuning failure-----------------------------------------127
Controls
AFCS------------------------------------------------ 368–369
PFD/MFD------------------------------------------18–19, 28
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 20–23
Control Wheel Steering (CWS)--------------------- 369, 396
Coolant temperature------------------------------------78, 83
Copy a Flight Plan------------------------------------------207
Course To Fix------------------------------------------------237
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT °F)--------------------- 81
Time--------------------------------------------------------238
Timer-------------------------------------------------------- 40
Dilution of Precision (DOP)--------------------------------- 17
Direct-to--- 159, 183, 184, 185, 186, 187, 221, 222, 271
Display backup-------------------------------------------10, 91
Display controls----------------------------------------- 18–25
DME
HOLD mode-----------------------------------------------113
NAV1 mode-----------------------------------------------113
NAV2 mode-----------------------------------------------113
Tuning mode--------------------------------------- 110, 113
DME audio---------------------------------------------------102
DME information-----------------------------------------56, 57
D
F
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Databases-----------------------------------------7, 8, 12, 513
Database synchronization-------------------- 516, 517, 519
Data entry------------------------------------------------ 27–28
Data Link Receiver--------------------------------------------- 4
Datalink receiver troubleshooting------------------------488
Data logging-------------------------------------------------482
Data Logging------------------------------------------------481
Date and time------------------------------------------------ 34
Day/Night views-------------------------------------- 449, 466
Day view----------------------------------449, 450, 466, 467
Dead reckoning---------------------------------------------- 73
DEC FUEL softkey-------------------------------------------- 85
Decision height (DH)---------------------------------------- 71
Declutter, display--------------------------------------------- 74
Declutter maps-------------------------------------------21, 26
Deice fluid----------------------------------------------------- 84
Delete Flight Plans------------------------------------------208
Deleting
An entire airway----------------------------------- 209, 210
An entire procedure------------------------------ 209, 210
An individual waypoint--------------------------- 209, 210
Flight Plan Items-----------------------------------------209
Density Altitude---------------------------------------------240
Departure
Procedure------------------------------200, 214, 227, 229
Select------------------------------------227, 230, 233, 236
I-2
E
Echo Tops----------------------------------------------------289
Emergency frequency---------------------------------------127
Engine Airframe Unit------------------------------------------ 3
Engine Indication System (EIS)------------------------ 75–86
Engine load-----------------------------------------------78, 83
Engine Page-------------------------------------------------- 78
ENGINE softkey---------------------------------------------- 75
Entertainment inputs---------------------------------------125
Estimated Position Error (EPE)----------------------------- 17
Field of View (SVS)------------------------------------------157
Flight director-----------------------------------367, 370–371
Pitch modes---------------------------------------- 373–379
Roll modes------------------------------------------------388
Flight ID----------------------------------------------- 114, 120
Flight instruments----------------------------------------43, 46
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC)------------------ 378, 402
Flight plan
Closest point to reference------------------------------220
Storing-----------------------------------------------------528
Flight Plan Pages (FPL)-------------------------------------- 32
Flight timer---------------------------------------------------- 39
FliteCharts-------------------------------------------- 413, 454
FliteCharts®-------------------------------------------------413
FliteCharts cycle---------------------------------------------469
FliteCharts expiration--------------------------------------469
FliteCharts functions---------------------------------------454
FPA----------------------------------------------------- 223, 261
Frequency
Nearest----------------------------------------------------179
Frequency spacing------------------------------------------- 99
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------527
Fuel
Calculations------------------------------------------------ 85
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------240
Endurance-------------------------------------------------240
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
INDEX
N
National Weather Service----------------------------------302
NAV1 audio--------------------------------------------------102
NAV2 audio--------------------------------------------------102
NAV frequency box------------------------------------------ 89
Navigation
Database------------------------------------------- 223, 224
Map--------------------------------------------------------185
Navigation Mode, AFCS---------------- 391–392, 400–401
Navigation mode selection--------------------------------101
Navigation (NAV) frequency box-------------------------- 44
Navigation source-------------------------------------- 58–59
Navigation status box--------------------------------------- 44
Nav radio selection-----------------------------------------101
Nearest
Airport-------------- 163, 164, 165, 166, 179–182, 235
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-01061-02 Rev. B
Manual Electric Trim (MET)------------------------- 367, 395
Map
Panning----------------------------------------------------136
Map Pages (MAP)------------------------------------------- 30
Map symbols------------------------------------------------533
Marker beacon----------------------------------------------109
Marker beacon annunciations-------------------------45, 70
MASQ processing-------------------------------------------- 87
Measurement units, changing displayed----------------- 35
Menus--------------------------------------------------------- 27
Message advisories-- 493, 498, 499, 500, 504, 505, 506,
507, 508
Messages
Reminder--------------------------------------------------- 40
Minimum descent altitude (MDA)---------------------71, 72
Missed Approach----------- 189, 237, 242, 245, 271, 408
Mode S------------------------------------------------ 114, 115
Mode selection softkeys-----------------------------------115
Morse code identifier---------------------------------------103
Multi Function Display (MFD)
Controls----------------------------------------------- 18–19
Softkeys----------------------------------------------------- 25
AFCS
Icing-----------------------------------------------------------304
IDENT function--------------------------------------- 116, 120
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------103
ILS approach-------------------------------------------------405
Indicated airspeed------------------------------------------- 46
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------238
INFO box-----------------------------------------------------458
Inset map----------------------------------------------------- 45
Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU)------------------------------- 2
Intersection
Information---------------------------------------- 167–168
Inverting a flight plan--------------------------------------207
IOI------------------------------------------------ 330, 340, 511
M
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
I
Land Symbols------------------------------------------------145
Line Replaceable Units (LRU)------------------------ 2–5, 11
LNAV----------------------------------------------------------245
Logging Data------------------------------------------------481
LO SENS------------------------------------------------------109
LPV----------------------------------------------------- 245, 271
LPV approach------------------------------------------------398
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading------------------------------------------------------- 44
Heading bug-------------------------------------------------- 44
Heading Select Mode (HDG)----------------------- 390, 399
HI SENS-------------------------------------------------------109
Horizontal situation indicator--------------------------44, 53
HSI double green arrow------------------------------------101
HSI magenta arrow-----------------------------------------101
HSI single green arrow-------------------------------------101
L
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
H
Jeppesen aviation database-------------------------------513
EIS
GDL 69/69A-------------------------------------------------276
GDL 90-------------------------------------------------------362
Gearbox temperature--------------------------------------- 83
GFC 700 AFCS--------------------------------------- 367–412
Glidepath-----------------------------------------------------269
Glidepath indicator------------------------------------------ 52
Glidepath Mode (GP)-------------------------- 384, 393, 406
Glideslope----------------------------------------------------269
Glideslope indicator-------------------------------------45, 52
Glideslope Mode (GS)------------------------------- 386, 405
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation----------------------------------------- 183–274
Go Around Mode (GA)----------------- 369, 387, 408–409
GPS Window-------------------------------------------------517
GTX 33 Transponder----------------------------------------114
J
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
G
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flow--------------------------------------------------------- 78
Flow totalizer---------------------------------------------- 85
Quantity---------------------------------------------------- 78
Remaining-------------------------------------------------240
Required---------------------------------------------------240
Statistics---------------------------------------------------240
Temperature----------------------------------------------- 78
Fuel Flow (FFLOW GPH)------------------------------------ 80
Fuel on Board-----------------------------------------------240
Fuel Quantity (FUEL QTY GAL)-------------------------80, 83
I-3
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
Airport Minimum Runway Length---------------------166
Airports Page-------------------------------- 164, 165, 166
Airport Surface Matching-------------------------------166
VOR------------------------------------------------- 179–180
Nearest airports, frequency tuning------------------------ 95
Nearest Pages (NRST)--------------------------------------- 31
NEXRAD------------------------------------------------------285
Night view--------------------------------449, 450, 466, 467
Non-path descent------------------------------382, 404–405
Normal display operation------------------------------------- 9
Reversionary mode-----------------------------------------127
Reversionary Mode--------------------------------------- 9–10
ROC---------------------------------------------- 330, 340, 511
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)--------------------------------------389
Roll modes, flight director-------------------------- 388–391
Roll Reference-----------------------------------------------389
RVSI---------------------------------------------------- 262, 263
RX indicator--------------------------------------------------- 93
O
SafeTaxi------------------------------------------ 413, 428, 431
SafeTaxi®----------------------------------------------------413
SafeTaxi database-------------------------------------------432
SBAS-------------------------------- 527, 242, 244, 527, 244
Scheduler------------------------------ 40–41, 413–414, 479
Secure Digital (SD) card---------------------------------7, 513
Selected Altitude------------------ 375, 377, 379, 383, 398
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)-375, 376, 377, 379
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc----------------------------158
Selected Course----------------------------- 45, 54, 392, 394
Selected Heading--------------------------------- 45, 54, 390
Selecting a COM radio-------------------------------------- 92
Sequencing, automatic-------------------------------------529
Servos---------------------------------------------------------395
SIGMET-------------------------------------------------------293
SiriusXM
radio--------------------------------------------------------474
Radio-------------------------------------------------------276
Receiver troubleshooting-------------------------------488
SiriusXM channel list---------------------------------------476
SiriusXM radio volume-------------------------------------478
SiriusXM Satellite Radio---------------------- 474, 476, 478
SiriusXM service class--------------------------------------475
SiriusXM Weather Setup
AIRMETs---------------------------------------------------293
SIGMETs---------------------------------------------------293
Slip/Skid indicator----------------------------------------44, 48
Softkeys------------------------------------------------------- 44
MFD--------------------------------------------------------- 25
PFD----------------------------------------------------- 20–22
Sort Flight Plans---------------------------------------------207
Speaker-------------------------------------------------------121
Splash screen, power-up-------------------------------------- 8
Split COM Operation---------------------------------------125
Standby frequency-------------------------------- 92, 95, 101
ADF---------------------------------------------------------110
Standby frequency field------------------------------------- 92
Stereo headsets---------------------------------------------121
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------127
Sunrise--------------------------------------------------------239
Sunset--------------------------------------------------------239
SVS troubleshooting----------------------------------------486
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------533
Synthetic vision (SVS)------------------------------- 413, 414
System annunciations--------------------------------- 10, 491
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
OBS mode----------------------------------------------------- 63
Obstacles---------------------------------------------- 500, 503
Oil
Pressure------------------------------------------------78, 83
Temperature-------------------------------------------78, 83
Oil Pressure (OIL PSI)---------------------------------------- 81
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- 528–529
Other Statistics--------------------------------------- 238, 240
Outside air temperature--------------------------------44, 65
Overspeed protection, autopilot--------------------------412
P
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Page groups--------------------------------------------- 29–32
Page menus--------------------------------------------------- 27
Parallel Track------------------------------------------ 213, 214
Passenger address------------------------------------------124
PA system----------------------------------------------------124
Pilot profiles--------------------------------------------- 36–37
PIREP---------------------------------------------------------306
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)--------------------------------------374
Pitch modes, flight director------------------------- 373–379
Pitch Reference----------------------------------------------374
Power up settings-------------------------------------------121
Power-up, system---------------------------------------------- 8
Primary Flight Display (PFD)---------------------------------- 2
Controls----------------------------------------------- 18–19
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 20–22
Procedure examples, AFCS------------------------- 398–410
Procedure Pages (PROC)------------------------------------ 32
Q
APPENDICES
Quick tuning 121.500 MHz-------------------------------- 94
R
INDEX
RAIM---------------------------------- 16, 232, 242, 243, 244
Range---------------------------------------------------------155
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)-1 6 – 1 7 ,
242, 527
Reminder messages----------------------------------------- 40
Required
Vertical Speed--------------------------------------------262
Vertical Speed Indicator---------------------------------262
I-4
S
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
INDEX
AFCS
W
WAAS--------------------------------------245, 398, 503, 527
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing----------------------------------529
Skipping---------------------------------------------------529
Waypoint Pages (WPT)-------------------------------------- 30
Waypoint Selection Submenu--- 183, 184, 192, 196, 243
Wind--------------------------------------------------- 132, 154
Winds Aloft--------------------------------------------------299
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
X
XM radio entertainment-----------------------------------125
XM Satellite Radio--------------------------------------------- 4
Z
INDEX
190-01061-02 Rev. B
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
V
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Unable to display chart----------------------------- 435, 455
Updating Garmin databases------------------------------432
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
U
EIS
Tachometer-----------------------------------------------78, 83
Tachometer (RPM)------------------------------------------- 80
TAF------------------------------------------------------------294
TAS------------------------------------------------------------505
TAWS-B-------------------------------------------------------333
Five-Hundred Aural Alert--------------------------------343
Terminal procedures charts------------------------- 435, 455
Terrain--------------------------------------------------------500
Color indications-----------------------------------------535
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS)-------510
Terrain-SVS---------------------------------------------------324
Terrain-SVS Annunciation----------------------------------- 45
Timer
Departure--------------------------------------------------- 40
Flight-------------------------------------------------------- 39
Timer, PFD generic------------------------------------------- 38
TOD---------------------------------------------- 261, 262, 268
TOPO DATA------------------------------------- 142, 143, 152
Top of Descent--------------------------------------- 261, 262
TOPO SCALE-------------------------------------------------144
Track indicator--------------------------------------------44, 53
Traffic
Annunciation---------------------------------------------- 45
Traffic annunciation----------------------------------------- 70
Traffic Information Service (TIS)-------------------- 531–532
Voice alerts------------------------------------------------- 70
Transponder----------------------------------------------------- 3
Transponder code entry------------------------------------118
Transponder data box-----------------------------------87, 89
Transponder ground mode--------------------------------115
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------116
Transponder status box------------------------------------- 44
Trim adapter-------------------------------------------------395
Trim, Manual Electric-------------------------------- 367, 369
Trip Planning------------------------------------ 238, 239, 240
Trip statistics------------------------------------------ 239, 240
True Airspeed-------------------------------------- 44, 46, 240
Turbulence---------------------------------------------------305
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------529
Turn rate indicator---------------------------------------44, 56
TX indicator--------------------------------------------------- 93
Vertical deviation-------------------------------------------381
Vertical deviation guidance-------------------------------224
Vertical deviation indicator--------------------------------- 45
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)------------------ 262, 263
Vertical navigation------------------------------------------223
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------222
Vertical Navigation (VNV)
Flight control--------------------------------------- 379–383
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)--------379–380, 403
Vertical speed guidance-----------------------------------224
Vertical speed indicator---------------------------------44, 51
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)----------------------------------377
Vertical Speed Reference----------------------------------377
VFR code-----------------------------------------------------119
Video settings-----------------------------------------------484
Video system----------------------------------------- 413, 483
VNAV---------------------------------------------------------187
VNV---------------------------------------------- 261, 507, 526
VNV guidance
Disabling--------------------------------------------------221
Enabling---------------------------------------------------221
VNV indications---------------------------------------------- 68
VNV Target Altitude--------------------------------- 379–382
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)-------------383
Voice alerts, TIS----------------------------------------------- 70
Voice alerts, TIS Traffic------------------------------- 351, 495
Voltmeter------------------------------------------------------ 83
Volume level
ADF-------------------------------------------------- 110, 112
VOR
Nearest--------------------------------------------- 179–180
VOR selection------------------------------------------------101
VSI-------------------------------------------------------------263
VS TGT------------------------------------------------- 223, 261
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
T
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Page (EIS)-------------------------------------------- 83
System power-up---------------------------------------------- 8
SYSTEM softkey---------------------------------------------- 83
System time--------------------------------------------------- 44
Zoom
Auto--------------------------------------------------------134
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
I-5
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
Blank Page
I-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42-L360
190-01061-02 Rev. B
G1000
®
Integrated Flight Deck
Pilot’s Guide
®
G1000 Pilot’s Guide
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099
www.garmin.com
Diamond
DA42-L360
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p:44/0870.8501241
f:44/0870.8501251
190-01061-02
Revision A
Diamond DA42-L360
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising